You are on page 1of 208

NOJA-5002-08

USER MANUAL

OSM Automatic Circuit Recloser


15kV 310, 15kV 312
27kV 310, 27kV 312
38kV 300, 38kV 302
with
RC Control
NOJA-5002-08

Revision History
Rev Author Date Comment
0 AZ 07-05-2013 First issue document of 300 and 310 Series Recloser combined. This new
document replaces the 200 Series Recloser (see NOJA-548 User Manual) with
new product 310 Series Recloser.
1 OA 11-11-2013 New features Power Quality, Maximum Demand Indication (MDI), Last Good Value
Trapped (LGVT), new Fast Key configurations (1-4), LAN Ethernet port added,
USBC2 configuration removed, new I/O Specification added, External Load
(Firmware 1.8).
2 OA 06-01-2014 Negative Phase Sequencing and changes to Live Line (Firmware 1.9).
3 OA 20-02-2014 Advanced Automation, Voltage Sag Protection, OSM 312 (Firmware 1.10).
4 OA 01-11-2014 Sectionaliser functionality, Live Load Blocking, Alarm Mode, Battery Test, User
Configurable Analogue Values, 2179 Protocol, Logic Channel extension from 8 to
32, Write protection of logic channels 17-32, Change in Directional Element
Protection (Firmware 1.12).
5 OA 30-03-2015 Negative Sequence Overvoltage (47N), Neutral Displacement Overvoltage (59N),
Battery Type, DNP3 Security Authentication, Changes to VRC and LLB. Inclusion
of 2 phase 38kV recloser (Firmware 1.13).
6 OA 19-10-2015 Modifications to System Status Menu, Sequence Advance, Modifications to Alarms
and Smart Grid Automation. Updates to Local and Remote Mode (Firmware 1.14).
7 OA 19-02-2016 Synchronism Check (25), Auto-Synchroniser (25A), Relay 15 Module (Mobile
Network, Wi-Fi Access Point, Global Positioning System), Power Flow Direction
Selection, Modifications to Overcurrent High Set and Low Set Elements, Moving
Average Mode and Inhibit trip functionality for OV3 Neutral Displacement
Protection (59N), Variable Fast Key Configuration (VAR1 and VAR2), IEC 61850,
Communication Log Settings. Included drawing for pole installation using C-clamps
(Firmware 1.15).

8 OA 13-09-2016 Relay 15 Communication Features, Broken Conductor (46BC) Protection,


Admittance Protection (21Yn), Switchgear model (3 Phase SEF) with 0.2A SEF,
LL Allow Close, Block functionality for EF, SEF and OV3, Changes to Fault Flags,
Displaying Alerts (Firmware 1.16).

Source: S:\Marketing-500\User Manuals\OSM38\NOJA-5002-08 OSM15 310, OSM27 310, OSM38 300 and RC Controller User
Manual.doc

NOJA Power® and OSM® are registered trademarks of NOJA Power Switchgear Pty Ltd. This
document is copyright and is intended for users and distributors of NOJA Power Switchgear product. It
contains information that is the intellectual property of NOJA Power Switchgear and the document, or any
part thereof, should not be copied or reproduced in any form without written permission from NOJA Power
Switchgear.
NOJA Power® and OSM® are registered trademarks of NOJA Power Switchgear and should not be
reproduced or used in any way without written authorisation.
NOJA Power Switchgear applies a policy of ongoing development and reserves the right to change product
without notice. NOJA Power Switchgear does not accept any responsibility for loss or damage incurred as a
result of acting or refraining from action based on information in this User Manual.

© NOJA Power Switchgear Pty Ltd 2002 - 2017


www.nojapower.com.au
NOJA
A-5002-08

CONTENTS
1  INTR ON .......................................................................................................................................................... 1 
RODUCTIO
1.1  APPLICABILITTY ........................................................................................................................................................... 1 
1.1.11  RC Firmwware .......................................... ............................................................................................................................ 1 
1.1.22  Control annd Management Software (CM MS) ....................................................................................................................... 2 
1.2  RMATION ............................................................................................................................................... 2 
SAFETY INFOR
1.2.11  Personnell Competence ........................... ............................................................................................................................ 2 
1.2.22  Hazard Sttatements .................................. ............................................................................................................................ 2 
1.2.33  Safety Insttructions .................................. ............................................................................................................................ 3 
1.3  CUSTOMER ACCEPTANCE AND
A NSPECTION ................................................................................................. 3 
INITIAL IN
2  SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................................................ 4 
2.1  OSM AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT RECLOSER ..................................................................................................................... 4 
O
2.1.11  Basic Opeerating Parameters ................. ............................................................................................................................ 4 
2.1.22  Ratings .................................................... ............................................................................................................................ 4 
2.1.33  Sensor Accuracy ..................................... ............................................................................................................................ 5 
2.1.44  D ......................................... ............................................................................................................................ 6 
Breaking Duty
2.2  RECLOSER CONTROL
O (RC) CUBICLE ......................................................................................................................... 6 
2.2.11  Basic Opeerating Parameters ................. ............................................................................................................................ 6 
2.2.22  Measurem ment Accuracy .......................... ............................................................................................................................ 7 
2.2.33  Filtering .................................................. ............................................................................................................................ 8 
2.2.44  Protectionn Accuracy ............................... ............................................................................................................................ 8 
2.2.55  Electromaagnetic Compattibility (EMC) P Performance ........................................................................................................ 9 
2.2.66  Power Suppply Module (P PSM) ................ .......................................................................................................................... 10 
2.2.77  Local Inpuuts ............................................ .......................................................................................................................... 10 
2.2.88  Input Outpput Modules ............................. .......................................................................................................................... 10 
2.2.99  Logic ....................................................... .......................................................................................................................... 11 
2.2.110  Smart Grid Automation .......................... .......................................................................................................................... 12 
2.2.111  Rechargeaable battery.............................. .......................................................................................................................... 12 
2.2.112  Mobile Neetwork Modem ........................
. .......................................................................................................................... 12 
2.2.113  WiFi Acceess Point................................... .......................................................................................................................... 12 
2.2.114  GPS ........................................................ .......................................................................................................................... 12 
3  OSM
M AUTOMAT ER .......................................................................................................... 13 
TIC CIRCUIIT RECLOSE
3.1  OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................................................ 13 
3.2  CROSS SECTIOON DIAGRAM - OSM ........................................................................................................................... 14 
3.3  DIMENSIONS – OSM 15-310 0 AND OSM 2 7-310 ...................................................................................................... 15 
3.4  DIMENSIONS – OSM 15-312 2 AND OSM 2 7-312 ...................................................................................................... 16 
3.5  DIMENSIONS – OSM 38-300 0 .................................................................................................................................... 17 
3.6  DIMENSIONS – OSM 38-302 2 .................................................................................................................................... 18 
3.7  O
OSM POLE MOUNTING BRA ACKET ........................................................................................................................... 19 
3.8  COMBINED OS SM/VT POLE MOUNTING B RACKET .................................................................................................. 20 
3.9  MAIN CIRCUITT BUSHINGS ......................................................................................................................................... 20 
3.10  DEAD-BREAK K ELBOW CONN NECTORS ....................................................................................................................... 21 
3.11  CURRENT AND D VOLTAGE SENSING E .......................................................................................................................... 21 
3.12  MECHANICALL TRIP ................................................................................................................................................... 21 
3.13  POSITION INDICATOR ................................................................................................................................................ 21 
4  REC
CLOSER CO C) CUBICLE ............................................................................................................... 22 
ONTROL (RC
4.1  OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................................................ 22 
4.1.11  Dimensionns - RC Controll ...................... .......................................................................................................................... 24 
4.1.22  Functionaal Diagram ............................... .......................................................................................................................... 25 
4.2  OPERATOR PANEL
A .................................................................................................................................................... 26 
4.2.11  General Control
C Pushbutttons ................ .......................................................................................................................... 27 
4.2.22  LCD Conttrol Pushbutton ns ..................... .......................................................................................................................... 28 
4.2.33  Fast Keys ................................................ .......................................................................................................................... 29 
4.3  C
CMS SOFTWA ARE ...................................................................................................................................................... 30 
4.4  POWER SUPPLLY MODULE (P PSM) ............................................................................................................................. 31 
4.5  SWITCHGEAR INTERFACE MODULE (SIM)) .............................................................................................................. 32 
4.6  RELAY MODUULE (REL) ............................................................................................................................................ 33 
4.7  COMMUNICATTIONS INTERFA ACE................................................................................................................................ 34 
4.7.11  Local Diggital Inputs ................................ .......................................................................................................................... 34 
4.7.22  I Modules ............................. .......................................................................................................................... 35 
Optional I/O
4.7.33  RS-232 .................................................... .......................................................................................................................... 36 
4.7.44  USB Comm munications Po orts .................. .......................................................................................................................... 36 
NOJA-5002-008

4.7.55  Ethernet (LAN)


(L Communications Port... .......................................................................................................................... 37 
4.7.66  Wi-Fi....................................................... .......................................................................................................................... 38 
4.7.77  Mobile Neetwork Modem ........................
. .......................................................................................................................... 40 
4.7.88  Global Poositioning System m (GPS) .......... .......................................................................................................................... 41 
4.7.99  External Load
L Power Sup pply for Commuunications Equipment....................................................................................... 42 
4.8  POWER SUPPLLY ........................................................................................................................................................ 43 
4.8.11  Battery Ciircuit Breaker .......................... .......................................................................................................................... 43 
4.8.22  Battery Teest............................................. .......................................................................................................................... 44 
4.8.33  UPS Settinngs ........................................... .......................................................................................................................... 44 
4.8.44  Power Maanagement ................................ .......................................................................................................................... 45 
4.8.55  External Load
L Supply Tim mer and Controolled Output ....................................................................................................... 46 
4.9  SAVING OF SETTINGS
E ................................................................................................................................................ 46 
5  MEA NT ........................................................................................................................................................ 47 
ASUREMEN
5.1  SAMPLING AN
ND FILTERING ......................
. ................................................................................................................ 48 
5.2  MEASUREMEN NT SETTINGS ........................................................................................................................................ 48 
5.3  SWITCHGEAR CONFIGURATION ............................................................................................................................... 49 
5.4  SWITCHGEAR CALIBRATION N .................................................................................................................................... 50 
5.5  REAL TIME CLOCK
L (RTC) SETTINGS
S ....................................................................................................................... 51 
5.6  USER CONFIG
GURABLE ANAL LOGUE VALUE ES ............................................................................................................ 51 
5.7  LAST GOOD VALUE TRAPPE ED (LGVT).................................................................................................................... 52 

6  OTECTION ............................................................................................................................................................. 53 


PRO
6.1  OVERCURREN N ................................................................................................................................... 53 
NT PROTECTION
6.1.11  Protectionn Elements for OC, O NPS and E EF ....................................................................................................................... 54 
6.1.22  Protectionn Settings for OC, NPS and EF F ......................................................................................................................... 54 
6.1.33  Time Currrent Characteriistic (TCC) Setttings ................................................................................................................... 55 
6.1.44  TCC modif ifiers ........................................ .......................................................................................................................... 56 
6.1.55  Sensitive Earth
E Fault (SE EF) ................... .......................................................................................................................... 57 
6.1.66  Broken Coonductor .................................. .......................................................................................................................... 58 
6.1.77  Directionaal Overcurrent Elements......... .......................................................................................................................... 59 
6.1.88  Admittancce .............................................. .......................................................................................................................... 61 
6.1.99  Live Line Overcurrent (L LL) ................... .......................................................................................................................... 62 
6.1.110  Cold Loadd Pickup Element (CLP) ......... .......................................................................................................................... 65 
6.1.111  Inrush Resstraint (IR)............................... .......................................................................................................................... 66 
6.1.112  Temporaryy Time Addition n (TTA) ........... .......................................................................................................................... 67 
6.2  F/YN) ....................................................................................................... 67 
AUTO RECLOSSING (AR OC//NPS/EF/SEF
6.2.11  Loss of Sup
upply Reclosing g Mode (LSRM) .......................................................................................................................... 69 
6.2.22  Zone Sequuence Co-ordina ation (ZSC) ..... .......................................................................................................................... 69 
6.2.33  Sequence Advance
A .................................. .......................................................................................................................... 69 
6.2.44  Auto Recloosing Map ............................... .......................................................................................................................... 69 
6.2.55  Sectionalissing ......................................... .......................................................................................................................... 70 
6.2.66  Single Shoot Trip (SST) ............................ .......................................................................................................................... 71 
6.2.77  AR OC/NP PS/EF/SEF/Yn Settings ........... .......................................................................................................................... 73 
6.2.88  Disable Fast
Fa Trips (DFT) T) ...................... .......................................................................................................................... 74 
6.2.99  Maximum Number of Trip ps (MNT) ........ .......................................................................................................................... 74 
6.2.110  Max No off Trips to Locko out (79 Lockoutt) ........................................................................................................................ 75 
6.2.111  Short Sequuence Mode (SS SM) ................. .......................................................................................................................... 75 
6.2.112  Alarm Moode ............................................ .......................................................................................................................... 76 
6.2.113  Operatingg Mode...................................... .......................................................................................................................... 77 
6.2.114  Alarm Lattching ....................................... .......................................................................................................................... 77 
6.3  AL BLOCK CLOSE ............................................................................................................................... 78 
RESET LOGICA
6.4  VOLTAGE PRO E) .................................................................................................................................. 78 
OTECTION (VE
6.4.11  Phase Undder Voltage (UV1) .................. .......................................................................................................................... 80 
6.4.22  Line to Linne Under Voltage (UV2) ........ .......................................................................................................................... 80 
6.4.33  upply Under Voltage (UV3) .... .......................................................................................................................... 80 
Loss of Sup
6.4.44  Voltage Saag Protection (UV4
( Sag) ........ .......................................................................................................................... 80 
6.4.55  Phase Oveer Voltage (OV V1) .................... .......................................................................................................................... 81 
6.4.66  Line to Linne Over Voltage (OV2) ........... .......................................................................................................................... 81 
6.4.77  Neutral Displacement Ovvervoltage (OV3 V3) ....................................................................................................................... 82 
6.4.88  Negative Sequence
S Overvvoltage (OV4) . .......................................................................................................................... 82 
6.5  AUTO RECLOSSING VOLTAGE ELEMENT (A AR VE) ................................................................................................... 83 
6.6  G .......................................................................................................................................................... 84 
HOT LINE TAG
6.7  FREQUENCY PROTECTION (F FE)................................................................................................................................ 85 
6.7.11  Under Freequency (UF) ........................... .......................................................................................................................... 86 
6.7.22  Over Freqquency (OF) ............................. .......................................................................................................................... 86 
6.8  R (LSD) ......................................................................................................................... 86 
LOSS OF SUPPPLY DETECTOR
6.9  VOLTAGE REC TROL (VRC) ................................................................................................................. 87 
CLOSING CONT
NOJA
A-5002-08

6.9.11  B) ..................... .......................................................................................................................... 88 


Live Loadd Blocking (LLB
6.10  AUTOMATIC BACKFEED RESTORATION
E (AABR) ...................................................................................................... 88 
6.11  AUTO CHANG
GE OVER (ACO O).................................................................................................................................. 90 
6.12  SYNCHRONISA
ATION .................................................................................................................................................. 91 
6.12..1  Synchroniism-Check ................................ .......................................................................................................................... 93 
6.12..2  Auto-Syncchroniser .................................. .......................................................................................................................... 93 
6.13  HARMONIC PROTECTION
R .......................................................................................................................................... 95 
6.14  PROTECTION STATUS CONTTROL (PSC) .................................................................................................................... 97 

7  NITORING .......................................................................................................................................................... 100 


MON
7.1  COMMUNICATTION LOG SETTINGS ......................................................................................................................... 100 
7.2  CLOSE OPEN (CO)
( OPERATIONS ........................................................................................................................... 101 
7.3  FAULT PROFILLE ..................................................................................................................................................... 103 
7.4  EVENT LOG ............................................................................................................................................................ 103 
7.5  CHANGE LOG......................................................................................................................................................... 103 
7.6  LOAD PROFILEE ....................................................................................................................................................... 104 
7.7  COUNTERS ............................................................................................................................................................. 104 
7.7.11  Lifetime coounters .................................... ........................................................................................................................ 104 
7.7.22  Fault counnters......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 105 
7.7.33  SCADA Counters
C .................................... ........................................................................................................................ 106 
7.7.44  DNP3-SA Counters ................................. ........................................................................................................................ 106 
7.7.55  GOOSE Counters
C ................................... ........................................................................................................................ 106 
7.8  FAULT FLAGSS ........................................................................................................................................................ 107 
7.9  CATIONS ............................................................................................................................................ 108 
USER NOTIFIC
7.9.11  Configurinng Alerts .................................. ........................................................................................................................ 108 
7.10  MAXIMUM DEMAND
E INDICA ATION (MDI) .............................................................................................................. 109 
7.11  POWER QUALLITY ................................................................................................................................................... 109 
7.11..1  Oscillograaphy ......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 109 
7.11..2  Harmoniccs .............................................. ........................................................................................................................ 110 
7.11..3  Long and Short Duration n Interruptions . ........................................................................................................................ 111 
7.11..4  Sags and Swells
S ...................................... ........................................................................................................................ 112 
7.11..5  Resetting data
d records an nd counters...... ........................................................................................................................ 113 
7.11..6  Saving Poower Quality Da ata to USB ....... ........................................................................................................................ 114 
8  CON
NTROL AND ON ............................................................................................................................. 115 
D INDICATIO
8.1  OPERATOR PANEL
A GS ................................................................................................................................ 117 
SETTING
8.1.11  Enabling and
a Disabling Fast F Keys ........ ........................................................................................................................ 118 
8.1.22  Delayed Close
C ......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 118 
8.1.33  Factory Seettings ...................................... ........................................................................................................................ 118 
8.2  C
CMS CONTRO ATION ......................................................................................................................... 119 
OL AND INDICA
8.3  S
SCADA CONTROL AND INDDICATION .................................................................................................................... 119 
8.3.11  DNP3 Setttings ........................................ ........................................................................................................................ 119 
8.3.22  IEC 608700-5-101/104 Settings .............. ........................................................................................................................ 120 
8.3.33  IEC 618500 Settings ................................. ........................................................................................................................ 121 
8.3.44  2179 Settings .......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 122 
8.3.55  Communiccation Port Stattus ................... ........................................................................................................................ 123 
8.4  INPUTS AND OUTPUTS (I/O)) .................................................................................................................................. 124 
8.4.11  I/O Controol ............................................. ........................................................................................................................ 124 
8.4.22  I Modules ............................ ........................................................................................................................ 124 
Enabling I/O
8.4.33  Local Diggital Inputs Sign nal Map ........... ........................................................................................................................ 126 
8.4.44  I/O Modulles Signal Map........................
. ........................................................................................................................ 126 
8.5  LOGIC .................................................................................................................................................................... 127 
8.5.11  Smart Grid Automation .......................... ........................................................................................................................ 128 
8.5.22  Logic Throottling ...................................... ........................................................................................................................ 129 
8.5.33  SGA Throttle Threshold .......................... ........................................................................................................................ 129 
9  INST N ....................................................................................................................................................... 130 
TALLATION
9.1  DE–CRATING ......................................................................................................................................................... 130 
9.2  R
RC CUBICLE PREPARATION N .................................................................................................................................. 130 
9.2.11  Auxiliary Supply
S Connections................ ........................................................................................................................ 130 
9.2.22  RC and OSSM Compatibillity ................... ........................................................................................................................ 130 
9.2.33  Initial Cheecks .......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 131 
9.2.44  Control Cable
C ......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 134 
9.2.55  OSM Reclloser Operation n....................... ........................................................................................................................ 134 
9.2.66  Programm ming Settings ............................ ........................................................................................................................ 135 
9.3  O TION ............................................................................................................................ 135 
OSM RECLOSSER PREPARAT
9.3.11  OSM HV Terminal
T Connections ............ ........................................................................................................................ 135 
NOJA-5002-008

9.3.22  HV Testingg .............................................. ........................................................................................................................ 136 


9.3.33  Mounting Bracket ................................... ........................................................................................................................ 137 
9.4  ATION ............................................................................................................................................... 137 
SITE INSTALLA
9.4.11  Transport to Site ..................................... ........................................................................................................................ 137 
9.4.22  HV Surge Arrestors ................................ ........................................................................................................................ 137 
9.4.33  OSM Instaallation .................................... ........................................................................................................................ 137 
9.4.44  RC Installlation ....................................... ........................................................................................................................ 138 
9.4.55  Earthing .................................................. ........................................................................................................................ 138 
9.4.66  Bird Guarrds and HV Cab bles .................. ........................................................................................................................ 140 
9.4.77  Auxiliary Supply
S ..................................... ........................................................................................................................ 140 
9.4.88  Communiccations Interfacce ..................... ........................................................................................................................ 140 
10  MAIINTENANCE
E ....................................................................................................................................................... 141 
10.1  O
OSM RECLOSSER .................................................................................................................................................... 141 
10.2  R
RC CUBICLE .......................................................................................................................................................... 141 
10.2..1  Battery Reeplacement ............................... ........................................................................................................................ 141 
10.2..2  Door Seall................................................ ........................................................................................................................ 142 
10.2..3  Upgradingg RC Firmwaree....................... ........................................................................................................................ 143 
10.3  FAULT FINDIN
NG ..................................................................................................................................................... 144 
10.3..1  RC Cubiclle ............................................. ........................................................................................................................ 144 
10.3..2  Recovery Mode
M ....................................... ........................................................................................................................ 145 
10.3..3  Copy Logss to USB .................................. ........................................................................................................................ 145 
10.3..4  OSM Reclloser ......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 145 
10.4  SCHEMATICS.......................................................................................................................................................... 147 
10.4..1  RC Generral Layout ................................. ........................................................................................................................ 147 
10.4..2  Control Cable
C ......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 148 
10.4..3  Power Suppply .......................................... ........................................................................................................................ 149 
10.5  SPARE PARTS LIST ................................................................................................................................................. 150 
11  APP
PENDICES ............................................................................................................................................................ 152 
11.1  APPENDIX A – GROUP SETT
TINGS ELEMENNTS STRUCTUR RE ................................................................................... 152 
11.2  APPENDIX B – DIRECTIONA N .......................................................................................................... 154 
AL PROTECTION
11.2..1  Overcurreent directional elements
e (DE O
OC, DE NPS, DE
D EF and DE SEF)
S ................................................................. 154 
11.3  APPENDIX C - SYNCHRONISSATION ....................................................................................................................... 157 
11.3..1  Synchroniism Limits ................................ ........................................................................................................................ 157 
11.4  APPENDIX D – TIME CURRE
ENT CHARACT C) CURVES ....................................................................... 158 
TERISTIC (TCC
11.4..1  ANSI TCCC ............................................... ........................................................................................................................ 158 
11.4..2  IEC TCC ................................................. ........................................................................................................................ 158 
11.4..3  User Definned Universal Inverse I TCC (U UDC) ................................................................................................................ 159 
11.4..4  Additionall TCC Curves .......................... ........................................................................................................................ 159 
11.4..5  TCC Libraary ........................................... ........................................................................................................................ 159 
11.5  APPENDIX E – ANSI SUPPO ORT.............................................................................................................................. 160 
11.6  APPENDIX F – INDICATION SIGNALS ..................................................................................................................... 163 
11.7  APPENDIX G – EVENTS .......................................................................................................................................... 172 
11.7..1  Protectionn Events.................................... ........................................................................................................................ 172 
11.7..2  Status Eveents........................................... ........................................................................................................................ 175 
11.7..3  Warning Events
E ...................................... ........................................................................................................................ 179 
11.7..4  Malfunctioon Events ................................. ........................................................................................................................ 181 
11.8  APPENDIX H – CHANGE LOG G MESSAGES .............................................................................................................. 184 
11.9  APPENDIX I – CONTROL AND INDICATION
N OF SETTINGS S ...................................................................................... 187 
11.10  APPENDIX J – OPERATOR PANEL
A MENU ............................................................................................................... 188 
11.100.1  System Staatus Menu ................................ ........................................................................................................................ 188 
11.100.2  Group Setttings Menu .............................. ........................................................................................................................ 189 
11.100.3  System Setttings Menu ............................. ........................................................................................................................ 190 
11.100.4  Event Logg, Counters and d Identification M Menus.............................................................................................................. 191 
11.100.5  Reset Dataa, Tests, Chang ge Password annd Save System Data D ....................................................................................... 192 
11.100.6  Entering Passwords
P ................................ ........................................................................................................................ 193 
12  INDEX ........................................................................................................................................................................ 194 
REFERE
ENCED STA
ANDARDS AN MENTS ................................................................................................. 197 
ND DOCUM
NOJA-5002-08

ACRONYMS

Item Definition

ABR Auto Backfeed Restoration


ACO Auto Change Over
ACR Automatic Circuit Recloser
AR Auto Reclose
BC Block Close
CD Carrier Detect
CLP Cold Load Pickup
CMS Control and Management Software
CO Close/Open
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CVT Capacitive Voltage Transformer
CT Current Transformer
CTS Clear to Send
DCD Data Carrier Detect
DCE Data Communication Equipment
DE Directional Element
DFT Disable Fast Trips
DGPS Differential Global Positioning System
DNP3 Distributed Network Protocol 3
DSA Distribution System Automation
DSP Digital Signal Processing
DSR Data Set Ready
DTR Data Terminal Ready
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility Performance
EF Earth Fault Element
EFLL Earth Fault Live Line Element
FE Frequency Protection Element
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GOOSE Generic Object Oriented Substation Events
GPS Global Positioning System
HLT Hot Line Tag
HRM Harmonic
HV High Voltage
IDMT Inverse Definite Minimum Time
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
I/O Input/Output
IP Internet Protocol
IR Inrush Restraint
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
LGVT Last Good Value Trapped
LL Live Line Overcurrent
LLB Live Load Blocking
LSD Loss of Supply Detection
LSRM Loss of Supply Reclosing Mode
LV Low Voltage
MAIFI Momentary Average Interruption Frequency Index
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker
MDI Maximum Demand Indication
MMS Manufacturing Message Specification
MNT Maximum Number of Trips
NPS Negative Phase Sequence
NPSLL Negative Phase Sequence Live Line
OC Overcurrent
OCLL Overcurrent Live Line
OF Over Frequency
NOJA-5002-08

Item Definition

OSM Outdoor Switch Module


OV Over Voltage
PCB Printed Circuit Board
PDOP Positional Dilution of Precision
PPS Pulse per Second
PROT Protection
PSC Protection Status Control
PSM Power Supply Module
RAM Random Access Memory
RC Recloser Controller
REL Relay Module
RI Ring Indicator
RMS Root Mean Squared
RTC Real Time Clock
RTS Request to Send
RTU Remote Terminal Unit
SAIDI System Average Interruption Duration Index
SAIFI System Average Interruption Frequency Index
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SEF Sensitive Earth Fault
SEFLL Sensitive Earth Fault Live Line
SGA Smart Grid Automation
SIM (Module) Switchgear Interface Module
SIM (Card) Subscriber Identity Module
SSID Service Set Identifier
SSM Short Sequence Mode
SST Single Shot Trip
ST Single Triple
SW Switch
TCC Time Current Characteristics
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD Definite Time
THD Total Harmonic Distortion
TDD Total Demand Distortion
TTA Temporary Time Addition
UDC User Defined Curve
USB Universal Serial Bus
UV Under Voltage
UF Under Frequency
UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply
UTC Coordinated Universal Time
VE Voltage Protection Element
VRC Voltage Reclosing Control
WiFi Wireless Fidelity (wireless networking)
ZSC Zone Sequence Co-ordination
NOJA-5002-08

DEFINITION OF TERMS

Item Definition

AR Reset Time
AR Reset Time refers to the period of time subsequent to a close after
which the Auto Reclosing (AR) element is ready to perform its full
sequence. Please refer to section 6.2 Auto Reclosing (AR
OC/NPS/EF/SEF/Yn).
Fault Reset Time Defines the time after which a pickup is no longer active before the
protection timer resets.

Lockout Lockout is when the device opens and cannot perform any auto
reclosing operation.

Pickup Pickup is an event which is initiated when the measured value exceeds
the pickup value configured by the user.

Protection Operation/ When a protection element detects a fault, a pickup occurs. When the
Trip Request protection time elapses, if the fault is still present a protection operation
is requested such as a trip or alarm.

Protection Trip A Protection Trip is when the device goes into the open position when
a protection operation is requested.

Sectionaliser Count The device waits for detection of Loss of Supply (LSD) before
increasing the sequence counter. In this instance the fault is detected
and “counted” but the device does not open. Please refer to section
6.2.5 Sectionalising.

Sectionaliser Trip A Sectionaliser trip is when the device waits for detection of Loss of
Supply (LSD) before opening. Please refer to section 6.2.5
Sectionalising.

Sequence Counter/Trip Counter The sequence counter is used to keep a record of the number of
protection operations within the sequence that have occurred.

Single Shot A device is in single shot when auto reclosing is disabled for any
reason. Please refer to section 6.2.6 Single Shot Trip (SST).
NOJA-5002-008

1 Inttroduc
ction
This manual appliess to the 300, 310 and 31
12 series ran
nge of OSM Automatic C
Circuit Reclo
oser and RC
C-10
Recloser Controller manufacture
m d by NOJA P
Power.

1.1 Ap
pplicability
The follo
owing produccts are coverred by this m
manual:
• O
OSM 15-16-800-310 (Au
utomatic Circcuit 3-phase Recloser
R rate
ed at 15.5kV
V)
• O
OSM 15-16-800-310-SEF (Automaticc Circuit 3-ph er rated at 155.5kV)1
hase Reclose
• O
OSM 15-16-800-312 (Au
utomatic Circcuit 2-phase Recloser
R rate
ed at 15.5kV
V)
• O
OSM 15-16-800-312-SEF (Automaticc Circuit 2-ph er rated at 155.5kV)1
hase Reclose
• O
OSM 27-12-800-310 (Au
utomatic Circcuit 3-phase Recloser
R rate
ed at 27kV)
• O
OSM 27-12-800-310-SEF (Automaticc Circuit 3-ph er rated at 277kV)1
hase Reclose
• O
OSM 27-12-800-312 (Au
utomatic Circcuit 2-phase Recloser
R rate
ed at 27kV)
• O
OSM 27-12-800-312-SEF (Automaticc Circuit 2-ph er rated at 277kV)1
hase Reclose
• O
OSM 38-12-800-300 (Au
utomatic Circcuit 3-phase Recloser
R rate
ed at 38kV)
• O
OSM 38-12-800-300-SEF (Automaticc Circuit 3-ph er rated at 388kV)1
hase Reclose
• O
OSM 38-12-800-302 (Au
utomatic Circcuit 2-phase Recloser
R rate
ed at 38kV)
• O
OSM 38-12-800-302-SEF (Automaticc Circuit 2-ph er rated at 388kV)1
hase Reclose
• O
OSM 38-16-800-300 (Au
utomatic Circcuit 3-phase Recloser
R rate
ed at 38kV)
• O
OSM 38-16-800-300-SEF (Automaticc Circuit 3-ph er rated at 388kV)1
hase Reclose
• O
OSM 38-16-800-302 (Au
utomatic Circcuit 2-phase Recloser
R rate
ed at 38kV)
• O
OSM 38-16-800-302-SEF (Automaticc Circuit 2-ph er rated at 388kV)1
hase Reclose
• Recloser Con
RC-10ES (R ntroller).
The OSM M 300 and 310
3 series reclosers
r havve three poles and are used in threee phase applications. The
T
OSM 30 02 and 312 series reclosers only ha ave two pole es, usually configured
c w
with one pha
ase through the
recloser and one pha
ase return for single phasse applications.
Before in
nstalling and / or operatin
ng the Reclosser or contro
ol, read and understand
u tthe contents of this manu
ual.
Note tha
at this manuaal cannot cov ver all the de ations in the equipment oor process being
etails or varia b describ
bed.
Neither is it expectted to addrress all con ntingencies associated
a with
w installattion and op
peration of this
t
equipmeent. In addition, not all features descrribed in this manual
m will apply
a to the O
OSM 312 series recloserrs.
For any further inform
mation or if you
y need asssistance in co n OSM 312 reecloser please contact yo
onfiguring an our
nearest NOJA Power Office or Distributor.

Note 1: SSwitchgear model


m with ma
atched Curren
nt Transforme
ers (CTs) to provide 0.2A
A Sensitive Earth
E Fault (S
SEF)
ssensitivity.

1.1.1 RC Firmware
F e
This manual appliess to Relay Fiirmware Verrsions 1.16.y
y.0, SIM vers
sion 1.10 annd Relay Dattabase Num
mber
19.0.1.0.
Any newwer versionss of firmware e may have additional features
f to those
t descriibed in this manual. The
ese
features will be desccribed in the firmware
f rele
ease notes.

OSM User Ma
anual Intro
oduction
n 1
NOJA
A-5002-08

1.1.2 Con
ntrol and Manage
ement So
oftware (C
CMS)
A compaatible version
n of CMS muust be used with the firm
mware loaded
d into the devvice. The cu
urrent release
e of
firmware
e requires CMMS Version 3.2.0
3 or laterr.

1.2 Safety Info


ormatio
on
Installation, use andd servicing should
s only bbe carried out
o by traine
ed and expe rienced pers
sonnel who are
familiar w
with the equiipment and electrical
e safe
ety requirem
ments.

1.2.1 Pers
sonnel Competen
C nce
It is the
e responsibillity of the purchaser
p to
o ensure thee personnel installing, uusing and maintaining
m the
equipme ent described
d in this manual are comp
petent. Minim
mum personn
nel competenncy requiremments includee:
• Familiarity with
w this manu
ual and its co
ontents.
• TTraining in industry acc
cepted safe operating procedures
p associated
a w
with both low
w and mediium
vvoltage equipment.
• T
Training and appropriate authorisa
ation to ene
ergise, de-e
energise andd earth pow
wer distributtion
e
equipment.
• T
Training in the care an
nd use of prrotective equ
uipment ass
sociated withh low and medium
m volta
age
a
applications..

1.2.2 Haza
ard State
ements
This man
nual containss three types
s of hazard sstatements, as
a follows:

2 Introductio
on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

1.2.3 Safe
ety Instru
uctions
General hazard state
ements used
d in this manu
ual are described below.

DANNGER: Contacct with hazardo ous voltage will cause deatth or

! seveere personal in
njury. Contact with Recloser or Control C
termiinals should o
only be underttaken when eq
Cubicle
quipment is issolated
from applicable soources of volta
age.

WAR RNING: This e equipment is not


n intended to o protect humaan life.

! Follo
ow all locally a
opera
approved safeety procedures s when installiing or
ating this equiipment. Failurre to comply may
m result in ddeath
or severe personall injury.

WARRNING: Before e working with h equipment described


d in thhis

! manuual carefully re
Impro
oper handling
ead and unde erstand the contents of this m
g, installation, operation or maintenance
m
manual .
ccan
resullt in death, sevvere personall injury or dam
mage to equipm ment.

WAR RNING: Powe er distribution equipment


e mu ust be properlyy
selected for the inttended operation. It must be installed, ussed and
! main
unde
ntained by com mpetent perso
erstand all rele
onnel who hav
evant safety procedures.
p Fa
ve been traineed in and
ailure to compply can
result in death, pe
ersonal injury or
o equipment damage.

1.3 Cu
ustomerr Acceptance and
a Initial Inspe
ection

NOJA Power produccts are assem mbled, tested


d, inspected,, packaged and
a dispatch ed from the factory meetting
all the re
equired qualitty criteria.
Inspect the shipping g packaging g for any exxternal signs s of damage. Unpack tthe product and inspecct it
thorough
hly for any signs of transit damage. F ile a claim with
w the carrie
er if transit daamage is fou
und.
Product damaged byy incorrect handling,
h insstallation or other
o e by the cusstomer or carrier will nott be
misuse
covered by a supplie
er warranty.

OSM User Ma
anual Intro
oduction
n 3
NOJA
A-5002-08

2 Sp
pecific
cations
s
2.1 OS
SM Auto
omatic C
Circuit Reclose
R er
All OSM Automatic Circuit
C Reclo
osers complyy with ANSI/IIEEE C37.60
0-2003, IEC 62271-111 and
a IEC 622
271-
200 stan
ndards.

2.1.1 Basic Opera


ating Parrameters
OSM
M-15-310/312 OSM-27--310/312 OS
SM-38-300/30
02
Current Se
ensing 3 x Current Transformers(31 0) 3 x Current Transfo
ormers (310) 3 x Curre
ent Transformers (300)
2 x Current Transformers (31
12) 2 x Current Transfo
ormers (312) ent Transformers (302)
2 x Curre
Voltage se
ensing 6 x Voltage Sensors
S (310) 6 x Voltage Sensorrs (310) ge Sensors (310)
6 x Voltag
4 x Voltage Sensors
S (312) 4 x Voltage Sensorrs (312) 4 x Voltag
ge Sensors (302
2)
Ambient te
emperature - 40° C to + 55°
5 C - 40
0° C to + 55° C - 40° C to
o + 55° C
Humidity 0 – 100% 0 – 100% 0 – 100%
%
1
Altitude 3000m 300
00m 3000m
Overall dim
mensions 800 x 668 x 653
6 mm (310) 800
0 x 746 x 744 mm (310) 932 x 751
1 x 913mm (300
0)
(length x w
width x height) 800 x 668 x 594
5 mm (312) 800
0 x 749 x 677 mm (312) 932 x 751
1 x 884mm (302
2)
Weight 100kg (310) 109
9kg (310) 150kg (30
00)
77kg (312) 83k
kg (312) 120kg (30
02)
Note 1: Fo
or altitudes abovve 1000m rating
gs should be co
orrected in accorrdance with ANS
SI C37.60-20033.

2.1.2 Ratings
1
OSM Type
e OSM-15-16
6-800 OSM-2
27-12-800 OS
SM-38-12-800 OSM-38-16--800
Manufactu
uring Model 310/312 310/312 3000/302 300/302
Rated maxximum voltage 15.5 kV 27 kV 388 kV 38 kV
Rated conttinuous current 800 A 800 A 8000 A 800 A
Fault make
e capacity RMS
S 16 kA A
12.5 kA 122.5 kA 16 kA
Fault make
e capacity Peakk (50Hz) 40 kA 31.5 kA
A 311.5 kA 40 kA
Fault make
e capacity Peakk (60Hz) 42 kA 32.5 kA
A 322.5 kA 42 kA
Fault breakk capacity 16 kA 12.5 kA
A 122.5 kA 16 kA
Asymmetriical Breaking Cu
urrent 17 kA 13 kA 133 kA 17 kA
DC compo
onent Interruptio
on capacity 20% 20% 200% 20%
Mechanica
al operations 30000 30000 300000 30000
Full Load O
Operations 30000 30000 300000 30000
Fault breakk capacity opera
ations 70 140 1000 140
Short time current withsta
and 3 seconds 16 kA 16 kA 122.5 kA 16 kA
Mainly actiive breaking capacity 800 A 800 A 8000 A 800 A
Cable charrging current 25 A 25 A 400 A 40 A
Line charg
ging current 5A 5A 5A 5A
Impulse wiithstand across the interrupter 110 kV V
150 kV 1770 kV 170 kV
Impulse wiithstand phase to earth and phase to phase 110 kV 150 kV
V 1995 kV 200 kV
Power freq
quency withstan
nd phase to eartth (dry) and 50 kV 60 kV 700 kV 70 kV
across the
e interrupter
2 2
Arc Fault C
Current Duration
n 16kA/0.2s 16kA/0
0.2s 122.5kA/0.2s 12.5kA/0.2s
Closing Tim
me <60 ms <60 ms
s <770 ms <70 ms
Opening T
Time <30 ms <30 ms
s <330 ms <30 ms
Interrupting
g Time <50 ms <50 ms
s <550 ms <50 ms
Arcing Tim
me <20 ms <20 ms
s <220 ms <20 ms
Notes:
1. A Switchgear model
m with match
hed CTs to provvide 0.2A SEF sensitivity
s is ava
ailable for all 3 pphase and 2 pha
ase tanks.
2. A special manu
ufacture type witth 1sec Arc Fau
ult Current Durattion capability is
s available.

4 Spe
ecificatio
ons OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Interrup
ption and Clo
osing Opera
ation Timing
g Diagram
Initiation Of 
Short Circcuit Primary Arcing 
Contactss Make
Actuation of 
Trip Circuit Primary arcinng 
contacts Parrt Final Arc 
Extincction

Time
Interrupting     Tim
me
Re
eclosing Interval
R
Release
Delay Opening Time Arcing Time
Contact Parting Time
Cle
earing Time

Note: R
Release Delay is the protection n operating time
e and it is defined as the time from when the ffault occurs to when
w the protecction
o
operation is trig
ggered. This tim
me will vary depe
ending on what protection settings have been configured.

2.1.3 Sensor Accu


uracy
Sensorr Type Accuuracy Ranges wheere accuracy guaranteed
Currentt Transformer ±0.2%
% 0 – 800A
odel)1
Currentt Transformer (0.2A SEF mo ±0.03
3% 0 – 800A
Voltage
e Sensors ±5%

Note:
1. A Switchgear model with matched
m CTs to
o provide 0.2A
A SEF sensitiv
vity, is availabble for all 3 ph
hase and 2 ph
hase
ttanks.

2.1.3.1 Current Transform


T mer Speciffication an
nd Operating Param
meters
Winding RRatio 2500:1
Percent RRatio Error 5-8000 A <0.1
Crad Pha ase Error >100A <0.055
Crad Pha ase Error at 10A <0.0333
Cross talkk up to 800A <1.0 A
Ambient ttemperature - 40° C to + 55° C
Protectionn Class Accurracy 5P100

OSM User Ma
anual Spec
cification
ns 5
NOJA
A-5002-08

2.1.4 Brea
aking Du
uty
Vacuum interrupter contact
c life is
s a function o
of interrupting
g current as illustrated in the graph below.

OSM15
5-16-800-310/312
2

OSM3
38-16-800-300/3002

OSM 27-12--800-310/312

OS
SM 38-12-800-300
0/302

h and low currrent numberr of operation


The high ns for each OSM
O type is summarisedd in the table below.

Rate
ed Number off Operations
OSM15-16--310/312 O
OSM27-12-310 0/312 OSSM38-12-300/3302 OSM38-16-300/302
Continuuous current 30,000 at 800 A 30,000 at 80
00 A 30,000
3 at 800 A 30,000 at 800 A
Interrup
pting current 6 kA
70 at 16 140 at 12.5 kA A
100 at 12.5 kA 1440 at 16 kA
Rated O
Operating Se
equence is defined
d as O – 0.1s – CO
C – 1s – CO
C – 1s – C
CO followed by 60 secon
nds
recoveryy time.

2.2 Re
ecloser Control
C l (RC) Cubicle
C
The Reccloser Contro
ol cubicle com
mplies with th
he following standards:
• IEC 62271-1
111/ANSI / IE
EEE C37.60
• IEC 62271 (P
Part 111 and
d Part 200)
• O
Other as notted in section
n 4.

2.2.1 Bas
sic Opera
ating Parrameters
s
Rated frequency, Hzz 50 / 60
Rated cubicle (auxiliary) AC supp
ply voltage, V 0
110/220

uxiliary) supply circuit break


AC (au ker 4A
Standa
ard operating duty O – 0.1s
s – CO – 1s – CO – 1s – CO
O – 60s
Degree of protection
n IP66/NE
EMA4
o
Minimum operating temperature, C - 40

6 Spe
ecificatio
ons OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Maxim g temperature, oC
mum operating + 55
mum humidity, %
Maxim 100
mum altitude above sea leve
Maxim el, m 3000
1
Opera
ating time afterr loss of AC su
upply , hours
• at -40°C 48
• at 20°C 120
• at +55°C 120

ht 2, kg
Weigh 42
Overall Dimensions, (width x heig
ght x depth) m
mm 400 x 10
080 x 309

Notes:
1. W
Without IO mod dule or other communication
c ns device.
2. B
Battery include
ed.

2.2.2 Mea
asuremen
nt Accurracy
Measured value Accuracy Ra
anges where accuracy gu
uaranteed

Phase to earth voltagess The greate r of ±1.0% or ± 0.1 kV 0.3 – 22.0 kV


Line to lin
ne voltages The greate r of ±2.0% or ± 0.1 kV 0.5 – 38.0 kV
Phase Cu
urrent The greate r of ± 1% or ± 4 A 0 – 800 A
Residual Current The greate r of ±5% or ±0
0.5 A 0 – 80 A
1
Residual Current the greaterr of ±0.02% or ±0.1 A 0.2 – 80 A
(0.2A SEF model)

Negative Sequence Cu
urrent The greate r of ±2% or ±4A 0 – 800 A
Active, re
eactive and tottal power ±2% 0 – 800 A, 4.55 – 38 kV
40
Power facctor ±0.02 0–1
Active and reactive ene
ergy ±2% 40
0 – 800 A, 4.5 – 38 kV
Frequenccy 46
6 – 55 Hz, 555 – 65 Hz
– at dF/d
dt<0.2Hz/s ±0.025 Hz
– at dF/d
dt<0.5Hz/s ±0.05 Hz

Phase An
ngle ±20 0-3600
Rate of C quency2
Change of Freq ± 0.2 Hz/s |dff/dt|≤ 1 Hz/s
± 0.15 Hz/ss 1 Hz/s <|df/dt|≤ 10 Hz/s
Notes:
1. Switchgear model
m with mattched CTs to p
provide 0.2A SEF
S sensitivity
y.
2. Averaging win
ndow: 8 cycles.

Oscillogrraphy

Phase cu
urrent The
T greater of ±1% or ±1 A 0 – 800 A rms
±5%
± 800 – 166000 A rms
Phase Vo
oltage T greater of ±1% or ±0.1 kV
The k 0 – 22 kkV rms

Harmonics

Phase cu
urrent (Harmon
nic 2 -15) T greater of 1% or ±1 A
The H1, 0 – 8800 A rms

OSM User Ma
anual Spec
cification
ns 7
NOJA
A-5002-08

Phase vo
oltage(Harmon
nic 2 -15) T greater of ±1% or ±0.1k
The kV H2-15
THD ±2%
TDD ±2% H1, 0 – 8800 A rms
Note: S
Sampling rate
e is 1600 samp
ples/sec.

2.2.3 Filte
ering
Harmo
onics rejection
n rates, not les
ss than
– seco ond 1:100
– thirdd 1:316
– fifth 1:1000

onse delay to a step change


Respo e in input curre
ent or voltage
– at o
output value ch
hanged by 10%
% of the inputt step 5 ms
– at o
output value ch
hanged by 20%
% of the inputt step 10 ms
– at o
output value ch
hanged by 50%
% of the inputt step 18 ms
– at o
output value ch
hanged by 80%
% of the inputt step 25 ms
– at o
output value ch
hanged by 90%
% of the inputt step 30 ms
– at o
output value ch
hanged by 95%
% of the inputt step 35 ms

Note: A
All protection and measurement is carrie ed out on the basis
b of fundaamental frequeency values with
w the excep
ption
o
of harmonic prrotection. Refe
fer to Section 6
6.13 Harmonicc Protection.
.

2.2.4 Prottection Accuracy


A y
Paramete
er A
Accuracy Accu
uracy Range
1,2
Operation
nal pickup current
– for p phase overcurrrent elements
s tthe greater of ±1% or ±1 A 0 – 8000 A
±±5% 800 – 16000 A

– for e
earth overcurre
ent elements tthe greater of ±2% or ±1 A 0 – 800 A
tthe greater of ±1% or ±4 A 80 – 8800 A

– for n
negative phase
e sequence ellements tthe greater of ±3% or ±3 A 0 – 8000 A rms
±
±10% 800 – 16000 A rms
s

– for a
admittance pro
otection

- Gn accuracy tthe greater of ±5% or ±0.05


5 mSi 0.05≤≤|Gn|≤327.00 mSi
- Bn accurracy tthe greater of ±5% or ±0.05
5 mSi 0.05≤≤|Bn|≤327.00 mSi
m

Operation
nal pickup volttage tthe greater of ±1% or ±0.1 kV
k 0.5 – 38 kV
Operation
nal pickup freq
quency ±
±0.05Hz 46 – 555 Hz for 50 Hz
H system
55 – 665 Hz for 60 Hz
H system

Tripping ttime for time current


c charac
cteristics: tthe greater of:: 0 – 1220 s for all tim
me current
charaacteristics
Definite tiime +
+1% or +35 ms
m / –10 ms
ANSI2 / IEEC2 / UDC2 / Additional
A MT curve2
IDM +
+3% or +50 ms
m / –10 ms

Reclose ttime tthe greater of ±1% or +10 ms


m 0.1 – 180 s

me3
Reset tim tthe greater of ±1% or +10 ms
m 0 – 100 s for overcurrent
5 – 1880 s for reclos
sing

8 Spe
ecificatio
ons OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Restoratioon time for au


utomatic backffeed tthe greater of ±1% or +10 ms
m 0 – 1880 s
restoratio
on element
Angle bettween voltage e and current for
f phase
overcurreent (OC), earth
h fault (EF), se
ensitive
earth faullt (SEF) and negative
n phasee sequence
(NPS) dirrectional elements (DE):
• DE OC ±2° At
A U1 ≥ 0.5 kV
V and I1 ≥ 3 A

• EF
DE EF, DE SE ±2° At
A U0 ≥ 0.5 kV
V and I0 ≥ 3 A
• DE SEF ±4° At
A U0 ≥ 0.5 kV
V and 1 A ≤ I0 < 3 A
4
• DE SEF (0.2A
A SEF model ) ±10° At
A U0 ≥ 0.5 kV
V and 0.1 A ≤ I0 < 0.2 A
±4° At
A U0 ≥ 0.5 kV
V and 0.2 A ≤ I0 < 0.3 A
±2° At
A U0 ≥ 0.5 kV and I0 ≥ 0.3 A
• D
DE NPS ±2° At
A U2 ≥ 0.5 kV and I2 ≥ 3 A
Notes:
1. P
Pickup is initia
iated at 100%% of pickup cu urrent value an nd drops off ata 97.5% (2.5% % difference). When a currrent
m
multiplier is ap
pplied to the pickup
p value th
he same perce entage (2.5%) applies to thee new calculatted value.
2. A
Applies to all curves,
c accuraacy in the rang
ge (I / Ip <160
00).
3. Trip time is noot accumulated while the ellement is belo ow the pickup current value.. If the element is between the
p
pickup curren nt value and the dropout cu urrent value then
t the resett timer will alsso not accumulate. When the
e
element is bellow the dropout current valu ue then the resset timer will accumulate.
a
4. S
Switchgear model
m with matcched CTs to p provide 0.2A SEF
S sensitivity
y.

2.2.5 Elec
ctromagn
netic Com
mpatibiliity (EMC) Perform
mance

Rated valu
ue Ap
pplicable stan
ndard
Dielecctric Withstand
d Voltage 2 kV IEC
C 60255 – 5
Rated Impulse Volta
age, at 0.5J 6 kV C 60255 – 5
IEC
Electro
ostatic Discha
arge IEC
C 61000 – 4- 2 (Level IV)
– conntact 8 kV
– air 15 kV

nity to Radiate
Immun ed Electromag
gnetic Fields 1 kHz 80% AM IEC
C 61000 – 4- 3
10 V/m

Electriical Fast Transsient/Burst Immunity 4.4 kV IEC


C 61000 – 4 – 4 (Level IV)

Surge Immunity (extternal AC voltage terminalss) IEC


C 61000 – 4 – 5 (Level IV)
– common 4 kV
– transverse 2 kV
nity to Conduccted Disturban
Immun nces 1kHz 80% AM IEC
C 61000 – 4 – 6
10 Vrms
Powerr Frequency Magnetic
M Field Immunity IEC
C 61000 – 4 – 8
– 1 sec 1000 A/m
– 1 min 100 A/m
Pulse Magnetic Field Immunity (6
6.4/16 ms) 1000 A/m IEC
C 61000 – 4 – 9
Dampe
ed Oscillatoryy Magnetic Fie
eld Immunity 100 A/m IEC
C 61000 – 4 – 10
Immun
nity to Voltage
e Dips and Inte
erruptions 0, 40, 70, 80
8 % IEC
C 61000 – 4 - 11
Immun
nity to Commo on mode disturbance (16.7, 50, 60 Hz) 300 Vrms IEC
C 61000 – 4 - 16
Burst D
Disturbance 1 MHz IEC
C 6100-4-18
Condu
ucted and Rad
diated RFI Emissions Class A FCCC Part 15
IEC
C 60255-2

OSM User Ma
anual Spec
cification
ns 9
NOJA
A-5002-08

2.2.6 Pow
wer Supp
ply Module (PSM))
Rated Vallue
Input AC voltage to PS
SM 99 - 146 V
Vac (110 Vac Setting)
S
198 – 264 Vac (220 Vacc Setting)
Frequenccy of input volttage 46 – 65 Hzz
PSM Output voltage to SIM 24-62 Vdcc (typical 45 Vdc)
V
Output DC
C voltage provvided for 12Vd
dc External Lo
oad 10.2 – 16 V
Ripple co
ontent of outpu
ut DC voltage 100 mV

Maximum
m external Loa
ad consumption
- continuous 20W
- at 50% dutyy cycle over 1 minute 40W
- AC only 15W
1
Maximum
m Power Consumption 65W
External lload short circcuit protection level 4.0A
Battery H
Hold Up Time after
a loss of AC
C Supply Refer to S
Section 2.2.1
Note 1: With no commmunication equ
uipment conneected to extern
nal load. Refe
er to Section 44.7.6 External Load
L Power
S
Supply for Co
ommunicationss Equipment.

2.2.7 Loca
al Inputs
s
Input T
Type Dry connnection
Time ffrom valid inpu
ut to activation
n of the contro
ol 20ms

Note: L
Local digital in
nputs on the re
elay are for usse inside cubic
cle only, unles
ss additional ssurge protectio
on is used.

2.2.8 Inpu
ut Outputt Module
es
Basiic parameters
s:
Module DC voltag
ge range 10.5 – 17.6 Vdc
Typical power con
nsumption 0.1 W

Digital inputs:
ed voltage, Vd
Rate dc 0-150 Vd
dc
Pickup voltage, Vd
dc above 7 Vdc
Rese
et voltage, Vdc below 3.5 Vdc
Maximum continuous voltage, Vdc
V 150 Vdc
c
Input current (per Input) < 3 mA
Edge
e/Level Trigge
ering Yes
Reco
ognition/Reset time, ms User Configurable [200 ms- 2 s]
Reco
ognition time resolution,
r ms
s 10 ms
Maximum time fro
om valid input to activation o
of the control 30 ms

put relay con


Outp ntacts:
Rate
ed voltage
– AC
C 9 – 230 Vac
– DCC 10 – 125
5 Vdc

10 Spe
ecificatio
ons OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Rateed current tota


al of all relays 12 A
Maximum breaking power
– DC C at L/R=1mss 30 W
– DC C at 125V 62 W
– DC C at 60V 90 W
– DC C at 12V 192 W
– AC C at power facctor 0.3 50 VA
Minimmum switching power
– DC C n 10 V, min 1000 mA)
1 W (min
– AC C 1 VA
Minimmum output pulse
p resolution 20 ms
Pulsse time accuraacy < +25 ms
Maximum time fro om actuation of o control to IO
O output 85 ms

Un RRegulated DCC Source for Inputs:


I
Volta
age Output range 6V
10 - 16.6
Maximum Currentt Output contin
nuous 40 mA

2.2.9 Logic
Rated Value
V
Inpu
ut:
Reco
ognition Time User Configurable [0- 180s]
Rese
et Time User Configurable [0- 180s]
Reco
ognition Time resolution 0.01s
Rese
et Time resolu
ution 0.01s

Outpput:
Maximum time fro om expression becoming Tru o
ue or False to 50 ms
exprression outputt (1) for variable
es, I/O and blo
ocking signals
s.

Maximum time fro om expression becoming Tru ue or False to


o 120 ms
(1)
exprression outputt , for protecttion configurattion and contrrol
signaals.

Minimmum “settling” time after ann expression o


output which has
h 1s
caussed a change to protection configuration
c o
or control of th
he
switcch before anotther configuraation change o
or control of the
switcch can be initiated by logic.

Note
e 1:
• More than 8 channels may result in overall slower operating
o times.
• The relay
r will apply logic
l throttling w
when 200 or mo
ore logic evalua
ations have occuurred within any
y 3 second inte
erval.
Referr to section 8.5.3
3.

OSM User Ma
anual Spec
cification
ns 11
NOJA
A-5002-08

2.2.10
0 Sma
art Grid Automat
A ion
Rated Value
V
1
Averrage time from
m valid input to
o output 500 ms
Maximum Fboot File
F size 1 MB

Notte 1: Respponse time is dependent


d onn the number and
a types of fu unction blockss used. In add dition a time de
elay
is app
plied when the
e throttle thresshold (150 eve
ents) is reache
ed. Refer to seection 8.5.3.

2.2.11 Rechargeable batterry


Rated Value
V
Tyype Sealed Lead Acid
Raated Voltage, V 12 Vdc
Raated capacity, Ah 24 - 26 Ah
A

2.2.12
2 Mob
bile Netw
work Mod
dem
Rated Value
V
SIM
M Card Size 2FF (2ndd Form Factor)) or Mini Sim
M Card Recommended Ratin
SIM ngs - 40° C to
t + 85° C

2.2.13
3 WiFi Access
s Point
Rated Value
V
Proto
ocol Supporte
ed 802.11 b/g/n
b of the W
Wi-Fi protocol
Band
d 2.4 GHz
z
Rang
ge 50 m (Internal Antennna)

2.2.14
4 GPS
S
Rated Value
V
Rece
eiver Type L1 Band
d GPS Receiveer
Systtems Supporte
ed DGPS, QZSS,
Q
SBAS(W
WAAS/EGNOS
S/MSAS/GAGA
AN)
Accu
uracy for PDO
OP < 2 for 95 e:1
5% of the time
Timing 2 s
± 250 µs
Longitude ± 15 m
Latitude ± 15 m
Altitude ± 45 m

Notes
1. Factors such as reflections
s from building
gs, trees and cloud
c cover ca
an degrade thee location accuracy.
2. The stated tiime accuracy y is in referen
nce to the sta ed by GPS”. Time stamp
atus of “Locke ps and any other
displays of tim
me are accura
ate to ± 5ms.

12 Spe
ecificatio
ons OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

3 OSM Automatic Circuit Recloser


3.1 Overview
The OSM tank is manufactured from powder coated stainless steel and is arc-fault vented. It has a 30 year
operating design life.
The OSM 300 and 310 Reclosers have three poles and the OSM 302 and 312 reclosers have two poles,
each with its own vacuum interrupter and insulated drive rod contained within a solid dielectric housing. Each
pole has its own magnetic actuator. The OSM tank provides an IP65 rating.
Energy for operation is provided by capacitors located in the Recloser Control (RC) Cubicle. The magnetic
actuators are mechanically interlocked, guaranteeing three phase simultaneous operation for 300 and 310
reclosers and two phase simultaneous operation for 302 and 312 reclosers. Magnetic latching holds the
mechanism in the closed position. Spring assisted trip operation is achieved by reversing actuator current
direction to generate a driving force in the opposite direction to a close operation.
The Recloser can be mechanically tripped by using a hook stick to pull the Mechanical Trip Ring downwards.
Position indication is located in the base of the tank and can be viewed by an operator on the ground.
Recloser open / close status is detected by the RC through monitoring the status of Auxiliary Switches that
reflect the position of the mechanism. An optional mechanical trip counter is available.
Voltage is measured at all six terminals for the 300 and 310 reclosers and all four terminals for the 302 and
312 reclosers, using sensors that are capacitively coupled to the HV terminals.
Current is measured on all three phases for the 300 and 310 recloser and two phases for the 302 and 312
recloser, using Current Transformers. These provide phase current measurement for indication, phase
overcurrent protection and residual current measurement for indication and earth overcurrent protection. The
Current Transformer secondaries are automatically shorted when the tank is disconnected from the control
cubicle.
The main circuit Bushings are manufactured from aromatic epoxy resin. A silicone rubber Bushing Boot
provides the required creepage distance. The Bushings have tin plated, brass connectors for termination of
overhead cables. The Cable Connectors can be supplied in the form of Tunnel Terminals to suit cables up to
260mm2, two hole NEMA Palms and other types of terminations are available.
The same OSM Control Cable is common to all three models. Earthing point is an M12 bolt into the tank.

OSM User Manual OSM Recloser 13


NOJA-5002-08

3.2 Cross Section Diagram - OSM


1. Vacuum Interrupter 9. Current Transformer (position varies with model)
2. Insulated Drive Rod 10. Capacitively Coupled Voltage Sensor
3. Magnetic Actuator 11. Opening spring
4. Aromatic Epoxy Resin Housing 12. Mechanical Trip Ring
5. Silicone Rubber Bushing Boot
6. Cable Connector
7. Stainless Steel Tank
8. Auxiliary Switches

Note: Current Transformer position varies in OSM 30x and OSM 31x series reclosers. OSM 300 model
shown.

14 OSM Recloser OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

3.3 Dimensions – OSM 15-310 and OSM 27-310


The OSM15-310 and OSM27-310 Auto Circuit Recloser is illustrated in the diagram below.

Earth Connector
Arc Fault Vent
Control Cable to RC10

Position Indicator

Mechanical Trip Ring

OSM 15-310 OSM 27-310

Dimension A 653 mm 744 mm


Dimension B 668 mm 746 mm
Dimension C 243 mm 283 mm

OSM User Manual OSM Recloser 15


NOJA-5002-08

3.4 Dimensions – OSM 15-312 and OSM 27-312


The OSM15-312 and OSM 27-312 Auto Circuit Recloser is illustrated in the diagram below.

Earth Connector
Arc Fault Vent
Control Cable to RC10

Position Indicator

Mechanical Trip Ring

OSM 15-312 OSM 27-312

Dimension A 594 mm 677 mm


Dimension B 668 mm 746 mm
Dimension C 514 mm 592 mm

16 OSM Recloser OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

3.5 Dimensions – OSM 38-300


The OSM38-300 Auto Circuit Recloser is illustrated in the diagram below.

Earth Connector
Arc Fault Vent
Control Cable to RC10

Position Indicator

Mechanical Trip Ring

OSM User Manual OSM Recloser 17


NOJA-5002-08

3.6 Dimensions – OSM 38-302


The OSM38-302 Auto Circuit Recloser is illustrated in the diagram below.

Earth Connector

Arc Fault Vent


Control Cable to RC10

Position Indicator

Mechanical Trip Ring

18 OSM Recloser OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

3.7 OSM Pole Mounting Bracket

Note: The bracket allows for the use of C-clamp


mounting as an alternative to through bolt mounting.

OSM User Manual OSM Recloser 19


NOJA-5002-08

3.8 Combined OSM/VT Pole Mounting Bracket

Lifting Points

3.9 Main Circuit Bushings


The OSM Auto Circuit Recloser main circuit Bushings are fitted with Silicone Rubber Bushing Boots to
provide the following creepage and taut string distances.

Model Creepage Distance Taut String Clearance


OSM15-310/312 596mm 210mm
OSM27-310/312 1066mm 296mm
OSM38-300/302 1284mm 355mm

The HV terminal Cable Connectors are a tin-plated, brass Tunnel Connector. This connector is suitable for
cable sizes from 40mm2 to 260mm2. Cables are secured in the connector with two hexagonal socket screws.
A tin-plated brass Palm Connector can be fitted to the bushing instead if required. This has two holes
44.45mm (1.75”) apart so a lug can be bolted onto the bushings.

Use an M12
socket to tighten Use an 8mm
the bolts to Allen Key to
50Nm. tighten the hex
screws to 30Nm.

Palm Connector Tunnel Connector


The HV terminals on the (nominal) source side are marked A, B and C. The corresponding HV terminals are
marked R, S and T.

20 OSM Recloser OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

3.10 Dead-Break Elbow Connectors


For the 310 series reclosers, dead-break elbow connectors can be used instead of the bushing boots. The
connector must be Interface Type C to DIN EN 50181. The model of the connector will vary depending on
many factors including cable voltage, current ratings, conductor size and the diameter over the core
insulation. Customers should take these factors into consideration when selecting a connector.

3.11 Current and Voltage Sensing


Current Sensing is carried out by three (3) Current Transformers, one on each phase.
Voltage sensing is carried out by sensors that are capacitively coupled to the voltage applied to each High
Voltage (HV) terminal.

3.12 Mechanical Trip


The Mechanical Trip Ring is made of stainless steel and is powder coated yellow. Less than 30kg of
downwards force is required to operate the mechanism.
When pulled down, a mechanical trip occurs and the OSM Auto Circuit Recloser is prevented from operating.
A ‘Mechanical Lockout’ is displayed on the panel to provide indication of the locked state. Pushing the Ring
back into the operating position returns the Recloser to normal mode.

3.13 Position Indicator

The OSM position indicator is located under a protective cover


underneath the tank and is clearly visible from the ground.
Indicator colour is RED when closed and GREEN when open.
A choice of language indicator is available at the time of order.

Shown are some available indicators; IEC standard I and O or


Portuguese ABER (ABERTO - Opened) and FECH (FECHADO
– Closed).

OSM User Manual OSM Recloser 21


NOJA-5002-08

4 Recloser Control (RC) Cubicle

4.1 Overview
The Recloser Control Cubicles are manufactured from powder coated stainless steel and provides IP66
rated protection standard for the equipment it houses.
The RCs have a secure locking system outer door with a door stay and padlock hasp. Battery
Battery GPS
Breaker
Escutcheon

SIM Module

I/O Module
Operator Panel

Document
Pocket
Control Cable
Connection

Relay Module

3 Point Handle
Locking Mechanism Radio/Modem
Mounting Plate

CMS USB Auxiliary Supply


Interface Circuit Breaker

Control Cable
Entry

Power Supply
Module
General Radio Antenna
Purpose Outlet Coax Entry Hole
Auxiliary Supply
Entry Holes
Earth Stud

I/O Wiring
Entry Hole
Note:
• Wi-Fi, GPS and Mobile Network connectivity only available in RC15 cubicle.

22 RC Control OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

The door has a document pocket inside for the User Manual and other customer documentation.
The operator has a clear view of all Operator Controls, Display Panel and CMS Port.
The Auxiliary Supply Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) and Socket Outlet are easily accessible.
The RC internal modules, connecting cables and their connection points, user communication ports and
relay inputs are easily visible and accessible.
The Radio/Modem Mounting Plate has space for extra Customer devices such as Radio, Modem and other
communication equipment.
The Power Supply Module (PSM) compartment has room for extra circuit breakers and surge protectors.
The Control Cubicle floor has multiple cable entry holes for additional user devices.
RC features include
• Operator Panel
• Provision for a padlock with 12mm hasp
• Space for radio, modem or other communications equipment (300 wide x 165 high x 180 deep)
• Miniature Circuit Breaker for auxiliary supply
• Socket Outlet
• Door stay to hold the door open at an angle of 110o
• Document pocket
• Vandal proof entry for control cable
• Dust proof drainage filter
• M12 Earthing stud
• Multiple Cable Entry Holes
• Battery Breaker.

OSM User Manual RC Control 23


NOJA
A-5002-08

4.1.1 D
Dimensio
ons - RC Control

Notes:
• D
Dimensions in
n inches show
wn in brackets.
• R
RC15 cubicle has two addittional entry ho
oles for Radio Aerial.

24 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

4.1.2 Fun
nctional Diagram
m
The funcctional structure of the OS
SM Recloserr with RC cubicle is illustrrated in the bblock diagram
m below.

Note:
• F
For the OSM 312
3 the HV Liine is 2 Phase
e.

OSM Re
ecloser Conttroller Intern
nal Module and Compo
onent Functiion

The Ope
erator Panel Module conttains the Use
er Interface for
f operator control.
c

The Pow SM) takes th


wer Supply Module (PS he auxiliary AC
A input and
d provides D
DC power supply to the SIM
S
module.

The Sw itchgear Intterface Mod dule (SIM) m module prov vides the powwer manageement, batte
ery charger and
a
incorpora
ates the capacitors that provide
p the trripping and closing
c energ
gy to the OS M tank.

The Rellay Module e (REL) con ntains the m


main microprrocessor con
ntrol, Digitall Signal Proocessing (DS
SP)
functiona
ality, Remote
e Terminal Unit
U (RTU), co ommunicatio
ons ports and
d standard diigital inputs.

The Coommunicatio ons Ports and I/O Mo odules provvide externa


al control annd indicationn functions for
Supervissory Control and Data Ac
cquisition (SC
CADA) or oth
her remote control applica
cations (Radio/Modem).

The RC1
10 Cubicle has been testted to stringe
ent EMC stan er to section 2.2.5 for dettails.
ndards. Refe

Note:
• D
Different SIM modules are used dependiing on the swiitchgear type connected
c to iit. Please reffer to section 10.5
1
S
Spare Parts List.
L

OSM User Ma
anual RC Control
C 25
NOJA-5002-08

4.2 Operator Panel


The Operator Panel Module consists of a sealed membrane keypad featuring push button controls with Light
Emitting Diode (LED) indication together with a 320 x 240 Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) backlit for night
operation.
The Panel is used to access the following information:
• recloser control and indication
• close/open (CO) operation details (log)
• view and change system and protection settings
• view and change communication settings and ports status
• view all counters (Lifetime Fault and SCADA counters)
• view the event log.
The layout of the Panel is
illustrated opposite, each of
the pushbutton groups are
General explained in the following
Control sections.
Liquid
Crystal LEDs embedded within the
Display panel indicate status. When
(LCD) executing a control the ‘new
status’ LED blinks to
indicate the change has
been accepted and is being
processed. Once the
change of status has been
confirmed, the ‘old status’
LED is extinguished and the
‘new status’ LED is
continually lit. This should
LCD not take longer than one
Controls
second.
The system running LED
flashes once per second in
Fast normal operation.
Keys The Hot Line Tag LED is lit
when the Hot Line feature is
active. HLT is activated from
the Protection Status screen
or remotely and can only be
removed from the source
from which it was applied.

26 RC Control OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-008

4.2.1 General Co
ontrol Pushbutton
ns

ON / OFF The
T Panel m must be turn ned on beforre a user caan use it for control and d
indication. Pu
ushing any button
b on thee panel will tturn it on. Th
he Panel willl
automatically
a y turn itself off
o again if no
n operator aactivity is de etected for 5
minutes.
m
The
T ON / OF FF pushbutto on also provides a meanss of testing the t LCD and d
all
a indicating diodes. Pres ssing and hoolding will cauuse all the LED’s to blinkk
and
a a test pa attern to display on the LC
CD.

Contro
ol Mode The
T Control mode pushbutton allows the Reclosser Control to be set to
o
either
e Local C
Control or Re
emote Control mode.
When
W in Loccal control mode,
m ation is avaiilable to botth local and
indica d
remote
r appli cations but controls can n only be exxecuted locally. When in n
Remote
R conttrol mode, indication is available too both local and remote e
applications
a but controls can only be e executed bby Remote applications.
a .
Data
D can stilll be viewed locally on thee LCD panel..
The
T exceptio on to this is an
a Open conttrol, which caan be executted locally orr
remotely,
r ind
dependent of o Control mode
m unless “Restrict Trrip Mode” iss
enabled.
e
When
W “Restrrict Trip Mode” is enabled, if the dev ice is in Rem
mote Controll
mode,
m local Trip comma ands are bloocked and iff the device e is in Locall
Control
C modee, remote Trrip commandds are blockeed. “Restrictt Trip Mode””
can
c be set vi a Logic and SGA.

Note:
N
• All co
ommunications s interfaces inc
cluding I/O annd communica
ations ports
can bbe configured as
a either a Loc cal or Remotee user.

‘I’ (Close) The


T red push hbutton labelled ‘I’ is used to close thhe recloser contacts. The
e
control
c is on ly executed if the Panel is set to Loocal control mode. If the e
Panel
P is set tto Remote co
ontrol mode the control w will not be ac
ccepted.
A delayed clo ose can be programmed d into the Paanel to allow an operatorr
time
t to move e away from the recloserr if required. A message is displayed d
on
o the LCD P Panel when the Close bu utton is pushhed and the Closed LED D
starts
s blinkin
ng. Pressing
g the ESC key k will canncel the clos
se operationn
otherwise
o the
e device will close after the time delaay has expirred. Refer to
o
section
s 8.1.

‘O’ (Op
pen) The
T green puushbutton la
abelled ‘O’ is used to opeen the reclos
ser contacts..
An
A Open con
ntrol can be executed
e in either
e Local oor Remote mode.
m

Note:
N
• Whenn the OSM tannk is disconnec
cted from the cubicle, both Open and
Close
e LEDs are turrned off.

OSM User Ma
anual RC Control
C 27
NOJA
A-5002-08

4.2.2 LCD Contro


ol Pushb
buttons
LCDD Contrast Adjustting LCD co ontrast is carried
c out by holding or repeate edly
pusshbutton pressinng this pus shbutton to cycle througgh the available range e of
contra st settings. Once
O released, the LCDD will retain the last contrrast
setting
g unless the RC is powered-down.

Navvigation These pushbuttonss allow moveement througgh the Panel menu structture
pusshbuttons and ch
hanges to setting values.
Once a field has s been selected for eediting, the up and do own
pushbu uttons are used
u to channge the valuue. Where the
t value be eing
change ed is a nummber, right and
a left arrow
w are used to select eaach
digit, u
up and downn arrows aree used to chaange the va
alue of that digit
d
only.

ENTER The EN NTER pushb button is used to access a field within


n the data meenu
pusshbutton once itt has been selected.
On preessing ENTE ER, the LCD will either ddisplay the ne
ext level scre
een
or sele
ect the brack
keted setting.
All setttings are password proteected exceptt for those accessible
a ussing
the Faast Keys, refe
er section 4.2
2.3.
A requ uest to enterr the passwo
ord is automaatically gene erated when the
user trries to edit protected parameters for tthe first time
e after switch
hing
the Paanel ON. The e only excep ACO setting which does not
ption is the A
requiree a password d. The factory set defaullt password is “NOJA”.
n example of how to enter the passwoord, refer to section11.10
For an s 0.6

ESC
C pushbutton The ESSC pushbuttton is used to
o either movve the user back
b one scre
een
or de–
–select a variable.

The LCD
D control pusshbuttons pro
ovide accesss to the follow
wing function
ns within the Panel menu structure:
• vview system status Date e & Time, Re
ecloser state (Open/Close ed/Lockout), Malfunction
n and Warnin
ngs,
Protection sttatus, I/O sta
atus, Powerr Supply stattus, Indicatio
on signals, C
Communications Port staatus
aand Protectio
on initiated
• vview Event Log, Close//Open (CO) operations record, Lifettime counterrs, Fault cou unters, SCA ADA
ccounters, Syystem setting
gs, Protection
n Group settiings, Commu
unication setttings, Protoc
col settings
• vview RC10 Controller
C component ide
entification an
nd software versions
v
• vview OSM Recloser
R seria
al numbers, measureme
ents and calib
bration coeffficients
• cchange Protection status
s of all setting
gs, except fo
or Protection group namees
• ttest operability of digital input
i / outpu t (I/O) relays
s
• sswitch Panel power OFF
F and externa
al load voltag
ge ON/OFF
• fforce save syystem data.
Refer to section 11.1
10 for detailed menu naviigation and lo
ocation of se
ettings.

28 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

4.2.3 Fas
st Keys
Fast keyys allow the status of pro
otection elem
ments and th
he active pro
otection grouup to be set by an opera
ator
using a ssingle push button.
b
The Opeerator Panel is supplied with
w one of fiive available
e configuratio
ons of fast keeys. In addittion, in orderr for
an opera
ator to use th
he fast keys, they need to
o be enabled
d in Systems Settings (reffer to section
n 8.1).
Pressingg the Fast Key
K will cycle through O
ON and OFF
F with the ex
xception of the Active Group
G key (ssee
below).
Note: F
Fast Keys can
nnot be chang
ged when the H
Hot Line Tag (HLT)
( is active
e.

The Protection Fast


F s to OFF, all
Key is used to turn Protection ON or O FF. When set
prote
ection elemen
nts for all gro
oups are disa
abled.

The Earth Fault Fast


F used to turn ON or OFF all Earth Fauult overcurre
Key is u ent elements for
all grroups. When set to OFF, all EF elemeents (includin
ng SEF) are disabled.
Note:: This key has
s no effect whe
en connected to an OSM 30
01 Single Phaase Recloser.

The Sensitive Ea arth Fault F Fast Key is used


u to turn
n ON or OF
FF all Sensittive Earth Fa
ault
overccurrent elements for all g
groups.
Note:: This key has
s no effect whe
en connected to an OSM 30
01 Single Phaase Recloser.

On Offf
The Auto-Reclos
sing Fast Keyy is used to
o turn ON or OFF all Autto Reclose elements
e forr all
group
ps.

The Cold
C Load Fast Key is ussed to turn ON
O or OFF Co
old Load Picckup for all grroups.

The Live
L Line Fast Key is use
ed to turn ON
N or OFF all Live Line eleements for all
a groups. It can
c
also be linked to HLT function
n. Refer to Section
S 6.1.8.

The Active
A Group Fast Key iis used to select which of the four P Protection Groups is active.
Once
e the approp priate group has been ch hosen (indica
ated by flashhing LED), press
p ENTERR to
make
e it active. Changing
C the
e Active Prote
ection group will reset all protection elements.
e

The Automatic Backfeed


B Reestoration Faast Key is used to turn ON or OFF
F the Automatic
Backkfeed Restora
ation function
n. Refer to Section
S 6.10.

The Auto
A Change e Over Fast Key is used to turn ON or
o OFF the A
Auto Change
e Over functiion.
Refer to Section 6.11.

The Under Voltag ge Fast Key is used to tu


urn ON or OFF
O Under V
Voltage eleme
ents (UV1, UV2
U
and UV3)
U for all groups.
g Refe
er to Section 6.2.12.

OSM User Ma
anual RC Control
C 29
NOJA-5002-08

4.3 CMS Software


The CMS software package provides configuration and control of all features and functionality. It is a
comprehensive device configuration tool and allows the user to:
• configure all Relay settings
• download all settings from PC to the Relay
• upload all settings, logs, fault profile, load profile, fault counters, lifetime counters from Relay to PC
• go On-Line and view all measurements, operate the OSM, configure Protection Status Control
elements, synchronise time/date to PC clock and erase Load Profile data.
• filter logs and profile information to assist in analysis of data
• print settings and all Relay historical data
• generate graphical representations of fault and load profile data
• import and export configuration files for use by other personnel
• configure User Defined curves and standard Time Current Characteristics using a graphical interface
• ensure relay co-ordination by importing co-ordinating device characteristics from a library of
protection curves
• configure protocol settings for SCADA control.

A PC running CMS can connect to the RC directly via the local Escutcheon USB port (located below the
Operator Panel). The connection type in CMS should be configured as “USB Direct”. The USB cable must
be Type A to B and the maximum length is 3m. If a USB extension cable is used it must have a power
supply.
CMS can also be connected remotely through a Serial, Ethernet or Fibre Optic connection to provide
engineering access to the RC Control.
Refer to sections 8.2 and 8.3 and NOJA-559 CMS Help File for more details on CMS and SCADA Control
and Indication.

Notes:
• In CMS, the switchgear serial number defines the recloser type. Please note that OSM 312 reclosers are
created as 3 Phase devices.
• 0.2A SEF reclosers are created as “3 Phase SEF” devices.

30 RC Control OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

4.4 Power Supply Module (PSM)


The Power Supply Module (PSM) supplies DC power (rectified AC) filtered and surge protected, to the SIM.
Typically the Customer AC Input supply to the PSM is from a step down Voltage Transformer (VT) or utility
Low Voltage (LV) mains.
A Dual input PSM for connection of second AC source is available as an option.
The double-pole Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB) input and Earth Terminals are accessed by removing a
safety cover. The MCB must be set to OFF before the Voltage Selector Switch is moved to either 110Vac or
220Vac. For wiring configuration see the diagram below.
The secondary side of the power supply has a 6.3A M205 fast blow fuse located on the top.
The PSM provides additional space for fitting customer devices such as surge protection beside the MCB.

Secondary Fuse

MCB

Socket
Outlet

AC Input Voltage Switch

Earth Terminal

Customer AC Connection

Note: The Dual Input PSM module consists of 2 x AC Voltage Switches, 2 x Secondary Fuses and 2 x Customer AC
connections. Please refer to section 10.5 Spare Parts List .

OSM User Manual RC Control 31


NOJA-5002-08

4.5 Switchgear Interface Module (SIM)


The SIM provides the power management, battery charging, and incorporates the capacitors that provide the
tripping and closing energy to the OSM tank.
The SIM module converts Trip/Close control signals from the Relay Module into current pulses applied to the
magnetic actuator coil to drive the contacts into the open or closed position. It also converts the OSM
auxiliary switch status into a logical position signal for use by protection and indication elements of the Relay
and filters the analogue signals from the OSM Tank.
The health of the OSM coil circuit is monitored by the SIM module. Depending on the problem, an ‘OSM OC’
(Open Circuit), ‘OSM SC’ (Short Circuit) or ‘Coil Isolated’ (Mechanical Trip operated) malfunction event will
be logged by the RC.
The actuator driver Trip and Close capacitors have the capacity to provide a complete rated duty cycle equal
to O – 0.1s – CO – 1s – CO – 1s – CO. The capacitors are re-charged within 60s after execution of the
above duty cycle.
The capacitors are charged within 60s (auxiliary power applied) of the Controller Control Cable being
connected to the Recloser.

Note: Different SIM modules are used depending on the switchgear type connected to it. Please refer to section 10.5
Spare Parts List .
.

32 RC Control OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

4.6 Relay Module (REL)


The Relay Module (REL) is responsible for all the functionality available in the RC Control through interaction
with the OSM Recloser, Switchgear Interface Module and Operator Panel.
The Relay Module provides the following functions:
• Measurement
• Protection
• Monitoring
• Control and Indication.
SIM Connection Ethernet Port

SIM Connection

I/O Module Connection


Panel (RS232P)
REL-02

Panel USB (CMS)

USB A USB B USB C Relay Running RS232 IN1 IN2 IN3


Flashing LED SCADA Port

SIM Connection Ethernet Port

SIM Connection

I/O Module Connection


Panel (RS232P) REL-15

Panel USB (CMS)

USB A RS232
SCADA Port IN1 IN2 IN3
USB B

Relay Running SIM Card Slot


Wi-Fi Antenna Flashing LED
4G Main and GPS Status LEDs for
Diversity Antenna Wi-Fi, 4G and GPS

Communication Ports
Relay RS232 USBA USBB USBC LAN Wi-Fi 4G GPS
REL-01 X X X X

REL-02 X X X X X
REL-15 X X X X X X
REL-15-4GA (Europe/APAC) X X X X X X X
REL-15-4GB (Americas) X X X X X X X

OSM User Manual RC Control 33


NOJA
A-5002-08

Note:
• Various REL--15 modules area available for the RC15
5 controller de
epending on ccellular band support requir
ired.
P
Please refer to
o section 10.5
5 Spare Parts List .
• There are thrree additionall Status LEDss on the Rela
ay 15 module
e to indicate sstatus of Wi-F
Fi, 4G and GPS.
G
P
Please refer to
o section 10.3
3.1.2 Relay Mo
odule.

4.7 Co
ommunications
s Interfa
ace
Remote communica ations with th
he RC Conttroller can be
b achieved by connectting to the communicatio
c ons
interface
e or by using the optional I/O Moduless.
All comm
munications interfaces
i inc and communications portts can be connfigured as either
cluding I/O a e a Loca
al or
Remote user.
All comm munications port wiring must be by means of screened cab ble with the screens earrthed to the RC
cubicle eearth at one end only. Where
W commu unications caabling exits the
t RC cubiccle, it must be
b isolated to o at
least 3kVV with surgee protection of 1kW or h higher to pre
event externa al surges froom entering the cubicle. An
appropriate RFI ferrite filter, should be fitted as well, loca side) floor of the
ated as close as possiblee to the (ins
cubicle.
Where a
an antenna iss required, a bulk head m
mounting surg
ge arrestor must
m be fittedd to the floor of the cubicle.
The RC cubicle is suupplied with a Radio/Mod nstallation of equipment with
dem mounting plate for in w dimensio ons
not grea
ater than 300
0w x 165h x 180d
1 mm. Thhe Radio/Mo odem Mounting Plate is ffitted with wing nuts and the
user can
n drill mountin
ng holes to accommodat
a te a suitable Radio/Mode
em.

4.7.1 Loca
al Digital Inputs
The Rela ay has three
e standard loc
cal digital inp
puts. These can be assig gned to any sstandard con
ntrol point, re
efer
to sectio
on 8 Control and
a Indicatioon for a comp plete list of controls availa
able.
The digittal inputs are ctions. No volltage is required to asserrt the input.
e dry connec
The inpu
uts are not issolated and must
m not be connected directly
d to cab
bles that exitt the cubicle. An interpossing
ust be used to isolate the inputs if con
relay mu nnecting to external equip
pment.
applications for these inp
Typical a puts include providing a close
c button on the basee of the cubic
cle or a warn
ning
switch to
o monitor if th
he cubicle do
oor has beenn opened.

Common TTerminals

Relay Modulee

Digital Inputss
IN1 IN2 IN3

Comm
mmon Relay Module TTerminals

IN1 IN2 IN3

34 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

4.7.2 Optiional I/O Modules


s
Up to tw
wo Input/Outpput Modules can
c be supp lied with the RC cubicle as a an option . Each I/O module
m has
eight optto–coupled in
nputs and eight voltage ffree contact outputs
o with normally opeen and norm
mally closed
contactss.
Using th
he CMS softw ware, any av vailable conttrol can be programmed
p for each inpput, refer to Section 8 fo
or a
complete e list of con ble for the I /O Modules. Any combination of avvailable indications can be
ntrols availab
program
mmed for eacch output, re efer Section 11.6 for a complete list of available indications. Default con ntrol
and indiccation setting
gs for the twoo modules arre listed in Section
S 8.5.
I/O Outputs
Ou
utput  1 NC
Outtput  1 NO
Outtput 2 NC
Output  2 NO
Ou
utput  3 NC
Outtput  3 NO
Output  4 NC
Output  4 NO
Output  5 NC

Output  5 NO
Output  6 NC
Output  6 NO
Output  7 NC
Outtput  7 NO
Output Common 

Output  8 NC
Output  8 NO
Output  8 C

A flashin onnection) wiill flash once


ng LED (nearr the CAN co e each second to indicatee it has been allocated ass
I/O Modu ule number 1.
1 The seconnd I/O Modul e LED will flaash twice each second.
e inputs may be sourced ffrom the 12V
Power supply for the V dc terminals on the I/O Module itsellf.

OSM User Ma
anual RC Control
C 35
NOJA
A-5002-08

4.7.3 RS-2
232
An RS23
32 port is ava
ailable on the
e Relay Mod
dule for connection to an RTU.
The RS2 232 port shou
uld not be co
onnected direectly to cable
es that exit th
he cubicle. A
At least 3kV of
o isolation an
nd
1kW of ssurge protecttion must be used if conn
necting to ex
xternal equipm ment.

DCD 1
Rx 2
Tx 3
DTR 4
GND 5
DSR 6
RTS 7
CTS 8
RI 9

Basic po
ort settings can
c be set fro
om the Pane
el as shown below.
b Advanced port coonfiguration is only availa
able
via a PC
C running the CMS softwaare.

RS2
232 SETTING
GS
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ⇒ Conne
ection Type
e Modem
Devic
ce Mode Local
Ø
Baud Rate 19200
[MAIN M
MENU] Duple
ex Type Half
ª [Systems Settings] Parit
ty None

ª [P
Port Settings]
s]
32] ⇒
ª [RS23

Port Setttings

T
Title Designation Ran
nge Resollution Fac
ctory Defaultt
Connecction Type Connection Type
T Disab
bled/Serial Dirrect/ Modem/ NA Disabled
Radio
o/GPRS
Device Mode Device Mode
e Locall/Remote NA Loca
al
Baud R
Rate Baud Rate 300/6
600/1200/24000/4800/ NA 1920
00
9600//19200/38400
0/57600/11520
00
Duplexx Type Duplex Type Half/F
Full NA Half
Parity Parity None
e/Even/Odd NA None
e
Note: The
e RS232P porrt is the Opera
ator Panel inte
erface.

4.7.4 USB
B Commu
unication
ns Ports
Three USB ports are e located on the Relay – USBA, USBBB and USBC C. Equipmennt with USB serial ports can
c
be directtly connected
d. These cann be used to connect many types of communicatio
c ons equipmeent.
Other intterfaces such
h as Serial, Wi-Fi
W and TC
CP/IP can be
e supported using
u approvved1 USB ada
aptors.
The USB
B ports should not be con
nnected to ca
ables that ex
xit the cubicle
e.
The USB B ports havee power overrload protecttion. Refer to 8.3. Advanceed port configuration is only
o Section 4.8 o
available
e via a PC ru
unning the CM
MS softwaree.
Note 1: O
Only NOJA Po
ower approved
d USB devicess should be co
onnected to these ports.

36 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ⇒
USBA SETTINGS
Ø
[MAIN M
MENU] Connection Type Disable
ed
Device Mode
M Loca
al
ª [System Settings]
S
ª [P
Port Settings]
s]
A] ⇒
ª [USBA
Port Setttings

Title Designa
ation Range Resollution Fac
ctory Default
Conne
ection Type Connection Type Dissabled/Serial Direct/
D Modem
m/ NA Disa
abled
Rad dio/LAN/WLAN/GPRS
Device
e Mode Device Mod
de Loccal/Remote NA Loca
al

4.7.5 Ethe
ernet (LA
AN) Com municattions Porrt
The Rellay, REL-02 has an RJ
J45 Etherne
et port. This is used to connect diirectly to Ethernet enab
bled
communnications equ
uipment.
om the Pane l. Advanced port configuration is onlyy available via a PC runn
ort settings can be set fro
Basic po ning
the CMSS software.
Any Ethhernet cablin
ng entering the t cubicle must be isoolated. Fibree optic cablee is recomm mended. Wh here
cabling exits the RCC cubicle, itt must be issolated with surge prote ection. It shoould also be e fitted with an
appropriate RFI ferrite filter, loca
ated as close
e as possible
e to the (insid T cable shield
de) floor of thhe cubicle. The
must be earthed at th
he customer end (not cub bicle).
Note: Ollder REL-01 relay
re modules do not have a
an RJ45 Ethernet port availlable. In this ccase a NOJA approved USB
B to
Etthernet converrter can be used instead.
Specifica
ations

Ethernet Type: 10
0/100 Base-T Compatible

LED Mea
anings: Le
eft (Orange) = Link, Right (G
Green) = Activvity

Ethernet Cable not exitting the cubicle: Ca


at5, Unshielde
ed Twisted Pair (UTP). Maxximum Length=
=1m

Ethernet Cable exiting the cubicle: Caat6, Screened d Foiled Twis


sted Pair (S//FTP). Maxim
mum Length=9
90m
aftter Surge Arre
estor.

Note: Etthernet surge protection


p (NO
OJA P/N: Ethe
ernetSurge-01
1) must be sup
pplied for all coonnections ou
utside the cubiicle.

LAN
N SETTINGS
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ⇒ Connect
tion Type LAN
Ø Device Mode Remoote
Obtain IP Automat
tically No
[MAIN M
MENU] IP Address 192.168.1.1
150
ª [Syste
ems Settingss] Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default
t Gateway 192.168.1.1
1
ª [P
Port Settings]
s]
ª[LAN] ⇒

OSM User Ma
anual RC Control
C 37
NOJA
A-5002-08

Port Setttings

Factory
Title Designation Range Re
Resolution
Default
Conne
ection Type Connection Type Disabled/LA
AN NA
A Disabled
D
Device
e Mode Device Mode
M Local/Remo
ote NA
A Remote
R
Obtain
n IP Obtain IP
P Yes/No NA
A No
N
Autom
matically Automatically
IP Add
dress IP Address Enter an IP
P address forr the RC NA
A No
N
cubicle.
Subne
et Mask Subnet Mask
M Enter a subnet mask. NA
A No
N
Default Gateway Default Gateway
G Enter a defa
ault gateway. NA
A No
N
Notes:
• R
REL-01 mode
els will not sho
ow the LAN po
ort configuratio
on or status op
ption.
• To drop a DH
HCP lease an
nd establish a new DHCP configuration, the LAN poort must be disabled
d and then
t
e
enabled.
Panel Na
avigation LAN STATUS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] Detected
d Type LAN
N
ª [Commun
nication Ports
s] Configur
red Type LAN
Device Mode
M Remote
AN] ⇒
ª[LA
Obtain IP
I Automati
ically No
IP Addre
ess 192
2.168.1.150
0
Subnet Mask
M 255
5.255.255.0
0
Default Gateway 192.168.1.1
1 1
MAC E0:A1:9
98:01:01:15
5

TX
X RX
Packets 93
30 929450
Errors 0 163

4.7.6 Wi-F
Fi
The RELL-15 module e incorporates Wi-Fi wire
eless connecctivity. The cu
ubicle suppoorts the 802.11b/g/n verssion
of the W
Wi-Fi protoco
ol which opeerates in the 2.4-GHz ba and and has s a range off up to 130 metres with an
antenna outside the cubicle (50m
m with an inte
ernal antenna
a).
Where a an external antenna
a is used, a bulk head mountting surge arrrestor must be fitted to the floor of the
cubicle. Any cabling entering the cubicle musst be isolated
d with surge protection.
The devvice can be configured
c a a “Client” or “Access Point”. Whe
as en it is confiigured as “A
Access Point””, a
maximum m of 4 clientss are able to connect con
ncurrently bu
ut only one se
ession per prrotocol is permitted.

When th
he connection
n mode is co
onfigured as ““Access Poin wing settings will be displa
nt” the follow ayed.

WLAN
N SETTINGS
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ⇒ Connect
tion Type WLA
AN
Ø Device Mode Remote

[MAIN M
MENU] Connect
tion Mode Access Point
ª [Syste
ems Settingss] SSID NOJA-1513021330055
atically
Provide IP Automa Yes
ª [P
Port Settings]
s] AP IP Address
A 192.168.0.1
N] ⇒
ª[WLAN Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Wi-Fi Tx
T Power Low

38 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

Port Settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Connection Type Connection Type Disabled/WLAN NA Disabled
Device Mode Device Mode Local/Remote NA Remote
Connection Mode Connection Mode Access Point/Client NA Access Point
SSID1 SSID NA NA NOJA-Relay Serial Number
Provide IP Provide IP Yes/No NA
Yes
Automatically2 Automatically
AP IP Address3 AP IP Address Enter an IP address NA 192.168.0.1
Subnet Mask Subnet Mask NA NA 255.255.255.0
4 High/Medium/Low Low
Wi-Fi Tx Power Wi-Fi Tx Power NA

Notes:
1. “SSID” which is the name of the access point is configurable in CMS only. By default it is equal to “NOJA-Relay
Serial Number”. In access point mode, the default value for the Network Key (or password) is “12345678”.
2. If “Yes” is selected the access point provides IP address automatically. If “No” is selected the client will need to
have a valid IP address. A maximum of 4 clients are allowed to connect.
3. The AP IP Address should be within one of the following private network ranges:
o 10.0.0.1 – 10.254.254.254
o 172.16.0.1 – 172.31.254.254
o 192.168.0.1 – 192.168.254.154
Values outside these ranges are not guaranteed to work.
4. This setting is used to limit the Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) of the Wi-Fi. High Power (18+/-2)
dBm)), Medium Power (10 +/-1)dBM) and Low Power (7 +/-1)dBm)).

Panel Navigation WLAN STATUS

[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] Detected Type WLAN


ª [Communication Port Status] Configured Type WLAN
Status Access Point Running
ª[WLAN] ⇒ Device Mode Remote
Connection Mode Access Point
SSID NOJA-1513021330055
Provide IP Automatically Yes
AP IP Address 192.168.0.1
Packets Tx 5 Rx 177
Connected Clients MAC and IP:
E1:A1:BD:17:12:C1 192.168.xxx.xxx
E1:01:28:18:12:AB 192.168.xxx.xxx
A0:A1:CA:C7:11:EE 192.168.xxx.xxx
E5:01:98:77:12:FE 192.168.xxx.xxx

When the connection mode is configured as “Client” the following settings will be displayed.

WLAN SETTINGS
Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] ⇒ Connection Type WLAN
Device Mode Remote
Ø
[MAIN MENU] Connection Mode Client
Obtain IP Automatically No
ª [Systems Settings]
IP Address 0.0.0.0
ª [Port Settings] Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0
ª[WLAN] ⇒
Wi-Fi Tx Power Low

OSM User Manual RC Control 39


NOJA
A-5002-08

Port Setttings

Title Designation Range Ressolution Fa


actory Defaultt
Conne
ection Type Connection Type Disab
bled/WLAN NA Dis
sabled
Device
e Mode Devic
ce Mode Locall/Remote NA Remote
Conne
ection Mode Connection Mode Acces
ss Point/Client NA Acc
cess Point
1
Obtain
n IP Automaticcally Obtain IP Automatiically Yes/N
No NA Yes
IP Add
dress IP Ad
ddress Enterr an IP address NA 0.0
0.0.0
Subne
et Mask Subnet Mask Enterr a subnet mas
sk. NA 0.0
0.0.0
Default Gateway Defau
ult Gateway Enterr a default gate
eway. NA 0.0
0.0.0
Wi-Fi T
Tx Power Wi-Fi Tx Power High//Medium/Low NA Loww

Note:
1. When “Obtainn IP Automaticcally” is set to
o “No”, the “IP
P Address”, “S Subnet Mask” and “Default Gateway” willl be
d
displayed and
d configurable. When “Obta tain IP Automaatically” is sett to “Yes” onlyy the “Default Gateway” willl be
d
displayed and
d configurable..

WLAN STATUS
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] Detected Type WLAN
Configured Type WLAN
ª [Commun
nication Port Status]
Status Connected to AP
WLAN] ⇒
ª[W Device Mode Remote
Connection Mode Client
Signal Quality Very Good
SSID NOJA-1513021330055
Obtain IP Automati cally Yes
IP Address 192.168.0.1
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Default Gateway
G 0.0.0.0
Tx RX
Packets 7 204
Errors 0 0
4.7.7 Mob
bile Netw
work Mod
dem
The REL L-15 module e can include e a mobile n
network mod dem that supports 2G, 33G and 4G mobile netw work
technolo
ogies. Differe
ent cellular bands are su pported depending on th
he relay moddule chosen (please refer to
section 1
10.5 Spare Parts
P List).

The sizee of the SIM card require


ed is 2FF (2n ctor) or “Mini Sim” and it should be an industrial SIM
nd Form Fac S
om - 40 o C to
rated fro o + 85o C.
A bulk head mountin ng surge arre
estor must b e used for any
a external antennas annd must be fiitted to the flloor
of the cu abling entering the cubiccle must be is
ubicle. Any ca solated with surge
s protecction.

Panel Na
avigation MOBILE NE
ETWORK SETT
TINGS
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ⇒
Connect
tion Type Mobile Network Modem
Ø
[MAIN M
MENU]
Device Mode Remote
ª [Syste
ems Settingss] tically
Obtain IP Automat No
ª [P
Port Settings]
s] IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
Settings] ⇒
ª[Mobille Network S Default
t Gateway 0.0.0.0

40 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Port Setttings

Factory
Title Des
signation Range Reesolution
Default
Conne
ection Type Connecttion Type Disabled/Mobile Network NA
A
Disabled
D
Modem
Device
e Mode Device Mode
M Local/Rem
mote NA
A Remote
R
Obtain
n IP Obtain IP Yes/No NA
A
No
Autom
matically Automattically
IP Add
dress IP Addre
ess Enter an IP address NA
A 0.0.0.0
Subne
et Mask Subnet Mask Enter a su
ubnet mask. NA
A 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway Default Gateway Enter a de
efault gateway
y. A
NA 0.0.0.0

Note:
• A
Additional advvanced setting
gs such as SIM M card settinggs are available e from CMS oonly.
• When “Obtain n IP Automaticcally” is set to
o “No”, the “IP
P Address”, “S Subnet Mask” and “Default Gateway” willl be
d
displayed andd configurable. When “Obta ain IP Automa atically” is set to “Yes” onlyy the “Default Gateway” willl be
d
displayed andd configurablee.

MOBILE N
NETWORK STA
ATUS
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] Detected Type Mobile Network Modem
Configured Type Mobile Network Modem
ª [Commun
nication Port Status]
Connection Stats Connected
ª[M ork] ⇒
Mobile Netwo Network Mode LTE(4G
G)
Signal Quality High

Device Mode Remote


Obtain IP Automa tically Yes
IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
Default Gateway 0.0.0.0

T
Tx RX
Packets 1541 16937
Errors 0 0

4.7.8 Glob
bal Posittioning S
System (G
GPS)
The REL--15 module has Global Pos
sitioning Syste
em (GPS) cap
pability which provides syncchronisation for
f accurate time-
stamping and location.

When GP
PS is enabled, the signal quality, time syn
nc status and position
p (latitude, longitude and altitude) are
a displayed..

The signaal quality is determined


d by
y the Position Dilution of Precision (PDO
OP) which relaates to satellite geometry at
a a
given time
e and locationn:

• PDOP less than 2: Excellen


nt
• en 2-5: Very Good
PDOP betwee G
• PDOP betwee
en 5-10: Low signal
s
• PDOP more th
han 10: No sig
gnal.

The time sync status will


w be displaye
ed as “Locked by GPS” if the
e time accurac
cy is less thann or equal to 10 µs.

OSM User Ma
anual RC Control
C 41
NOJA
A-5002-08

Panel Na
avigation GPS
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ⇒
GPS Enabled
Ø Status
s Norm
mal
[MAIN M
MENU] Signal
l Quality Excelle
ent
Time Sync
S s
Status Locked
L by GPS
G
ª [GPS] ⇒
Latitu
ude (degree
e) -27.4512
227
Longit ee)
tude (degre 153.1022
239
Altitu
ude (m) 2

Port Setttings

Title
e Designation R
Range Res
solution Factory
y Default
GPS GPS Enabled/Dissabled NA Disabled

Note:
• When GPS iss enabled, it has
h priority oveer SCADA tim me synchronisation and set time comman
nds from the HMI
H
p
panel and CM
MS unless the GPS signal iss not available.

4.7.9 Exte
ernal Loa
ad Powe r Supply
y for Com
mmunica
ations Eq
quipmentt
A 12Vdcc power supply for comm munications equipment is located on
n the SIM m
module. Refer to section 4.5
Switchge e Module (SIM) and sectiion 10.4.1 RC
ear Interface R General Layout.
L External Sup
The E pply Output ccan
be turned ON or OFF F from the Pa
anel or CMSS software.
The powwer supply iss rated at 12
2V 20W on a average ove
er a rolling 60
6 seconds w
window. Th
he external lo
oad
supply switches off im
mmediately ifi the currentt exceeds 5.8
8A.
The exte
ernal power supply
s outpu
ut is software
e managed tot minimize the
t risk of ovverloading th
he power sup
pply
system. Refer to secction 4.8.5 External Loadd Supply Tim
mer and Contrrolled Outputt.
The outp
put/overload protection mechanism
m iss detailed below.
Battery Supply abo
ove 11.0 V:
• If the currentt is above 5.8
8 A for 25mss then the exxternal supply
y will turn offf immediately
y and stay offf
u
until the custtomer turns the
t external supply on ag gain. Please note that theere is a 1 minnute period in
w
which the su upply will stay
y off and can
nnot be turneed back on until the 1 minnute period has
h elapsed.
• T
The externall supply will supply
s 20 W on average over a rolling 60 secondds window. So, S for examp ple,
if the externa
al load supplies 30W in thhe first 30 se
econds then only 10W caan be supplie ed over the next
n
3
30 seconds to t ensure an n overload dooes not occur as shown in Example 2 below.

42 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

• WWhen the suupply is turne


ed off becausse of the pow
wer being exc
ceeded, it wiill be reported in the even
nt
llog as an extternal supply
y overload.

AC ON, Battery Sup pply below 11.01 V or dis


sconnected:
• T The external supply cann not draw mo ore than 15W
W on average e over a rollinng 60 seconds window. If it
ddoes it will shut
s off within
n 10ms. The state will be
e reported in the event loog as shutdo own. When the
ssupply shutss down under this conditiion it automa atically turns back on wheen a battery supply of more
m
tthan 11.6 vo olts is connec cted.
Drawing morre than 15W in this instan
nce may cau
use the RC to n some cases.
o shutdown aand restart in

AC OFF
F, Battery Su
upply below 11.0 V:
• TThe externall supply is offf.
POWER SUP
PPLY STATUS
Panel Na
avigation
Last Pow
wer Restart
t:
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] 14:00:57
7 14/10/1
11
ª [P y] ⇒
Power Supply
AC Input
t OFF
Battery Voltage (U
Ubt) 13.8V
Battery Current (I
Ibt) 0.50A
Battery Capacity (%) 100
External
l Load Outp
put OFF

Battery Test Initiate


Battery Test Resul
lt:
23:52:00
0 22/01/20014
ed
Battery Test Passe

Warning::
• DDo not connect communica
ations equipme
ent directly to the battery te
erminals. Thiss can drain the
e battery, causse a
ssystem shutdo
own or damag
ge the equipm
ment.

Notes:
• The external load
l output wiill indicate OFF
F when the exxternal supply is shut-down due to Extern nal Load Time-out
when there iss loss of AC Supply
S or whe
en the battery is low. Please
e refer to 4.8..5 External Lo
oad Supply Tiimer
a
and Controlledd Output.
• IIf a device con
nnected to the
e external suppply becomes faulty and the RC-10 is opeerating only fro
om the AC sup
pply
tthen the contrroller may be forced into co ets. Under thiis circumstancce the device connected to the
ontinuous rese
eexternal supplly should be disconnected.
d

4.8 Po
ower Supply
A Powerr Supply Moddule (PSM) provides
p filte ring, surge protection,
p an
nd DC voltagge to the SIM
M module. Re
efer
to sectio
on 4.4 Power Supply Mod
dule (PSM).
The SIMM module pro ovides the po
ower manageement for thee Recloser Control
C with a 12Vdc batttery for backkup.
Refer to section 4.5 Switchgear Interface Mo
odule (SIM).
To manu
ually shutdow
wn the contro
oller, turn offf the auxiliary
y supply and the battery ccircuit breake
er.

4.8.1 Batttery Circuit Break


ker
A circuitt breaker is provided next to the batttery to prote ery from shoort circuit currents. Refer to
ect the batte
section 110.4.3 Power Supply.

OSM User Ma
anual RC Control
C 43
NOJA
A-5002-08

It can alsso be used to


t disconnec ct the batteryy from the cu
ubicle. If the battery is tuurned OFF fo or more thann 60
secondss, or the batte
ery voltage drops
d below 5 volts, thenn the system clock time w will be reset. An inline 6.3A
M205 fasst blow fuse is provided on
o the positivve terminal of
o the battery y for extra prootection.

4.8.2 Batttery Testt


A batterry test can be
b initiated manually
m to check the state
s of the battery. Allternatively the
t test can be
configureed to run auttomatically at a regular tim
me interval (Refer
( to Secction 4.8.3 U PS Settings)).

The batttery test will apply a load 3 seconds. The result of the test will
d across the battery for 30 w be displayyed
on the paanel.

Panel Na
avigation POWER SU
UPPLY STATU
US

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] Last Po
ower Restar
rt:
ª [P y] ⇒
Power Supply 14:00:5
57 14/10/
/11

AC Inpu
ut OF
FF
Battery
y Voltage (
(Ubt) 13.8
8V
Battery
y Current (
(Ibt) 0.50
0A
Battery
y Capacity (%) 10
00
Externa
al Load Out
tput OF
FF
Battery
y Test Initiat
te

Battery
y Test Resu
ult:
11:42:0
00 22/01/22015
Battery
y Test Pass
sed

Notes:
• IIf the battery is not connec cted, AC not a applied, batteery is discharg
ging at > 100m mA or batteryy voltage < 12 2.5V
tthen a “Batterry Test Not Pe erformed” will b
be indicated.
• IIf a battery teest is performed the next ttest will be blo ocked for 5 minutes.
m If ann attempt is made
m to initiatte a
bbattery test duuring this perio od then a “Ba ttery Test Nott Performed” will
w also be inddicated. The reason
r being that
tthe Battery Te est Circuit is re
esting.
• IIf the battery test
t circuit is fa
aulty, “SIM Cirrcuit Faulty” will
w be indicated.
• SSIM software supported is 1.8.x 1 and abovve.

4.8.3 UPS
S Settings
Panel Na
avigation
UPS SETTINGS
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ⇒
Ø Battery
y Shutdown Level (%): 20
Rated Capacity
C (A
Ah) 26
[MAIN M
MENU]
Battery
y Type AG
GM
ª [System Settings]
S External Load Timme (min) 120
1
ª [U NGS] ⇒
UPS SETTIN External Load Re set Time (hr) 0
USB Host Ports S hutdown Enable NO
Mobile Network TTime (min) 1
120
Mobile Network RReset Time (hr) 0
WLAN Time (min) 1
120
WLAN Reset Time (hr) 0

Battery
y Test
Auto Test Off
O
Time Interval (d ays) 30

44 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

UPS Setttings
Factory
Title D esignation Range Resolution
Default
Batteryy Shutdown Level
L (%) Battery Shuttdown Level 10 – 50% 10% 20
Rated battery capaccity (Ah) Rated Capaccity 10 – 50Ah 1Ah 26
(1)
Batteryy Type Battery Type
e AG
GM/GEL - AGM
nal Load Time (2) (min)
Extern External Loa
ad Time 0 – 1440min 1min 120
Extern et Time(3)
nal Load Rese External Loa
ad Reset Time
e 0 – 720hr 1hr 0
(hr)
USB H
Host Ports Shu
utdown USB Host Po
orts Shutdown
n Enable No
o/Yes NA No
e(4)
Enable
(5)
Mobile
e Network Tim
me (min) Mobile Netw
work Time (min
n) 0 – 1440 min 1 min 120

Mobile
e Network Reset
R Time Mobile Netw
work Reset Tim
me (hr) 0 – 720 hr 1 hr 0
(hr)
(6
6)
WLAN
N Time (min) WLAN Time (min) 0 – 1440 min 1 min 120

WLAN
N Reset Time (hr)
( WLAN Rese
et Time (hr) 0 – 720 hr 1 hr 0
(7)
Auto T
Test Auto Batteryy Test On
n/Off NA Off
Time IInterval (days)) Interval (dayys) 1-3
365 NA 30
Notes:
1. Battery Type selection is applicable
a fromm SIM version n 1.9.0 and above
a and it iss password prrotected. Note e: If
the wrong battery type is se elected batteryry can be overrcharged or da amaged.
2. The time to tu urn off the Extternal Load in case of loss of o AC supply. The External LLoad will not turn t off if Exte
ernal
Load Time is set to 0.
3. The External Load Reset Time T will not cyycle the load supply
s if set to
o 0.
4. USB Host Po orts Shutdown n occurs when n External Lo oad Time expiires. If it is seet to 0, the USB
U Ports will not
shutdown.
5. The time to turn off the Mo obile Network Modem in ca ase of loss of AC A supply. Thhe Mobile Nettwork Modem will
not turn off if Mobile Netwo ork Time is sett to 0.
6. The time to tu urn off WLAN in case of losss of AC supply y. The WLAN will not turn ooff if WLAN Tim me is set to 0.
7. Auto Test wiill start a batttery test afterr the first time interval from m being enabbled and then n the test willl be
conducted on n a regular basis at that tim me interval set by the user. If I the system is restarted th
he counter forr the
time interval will
w be reset. Refer
R to sectioon 4.8.2 for iniitiating the batttery test manuually.

4.8.4 Pow
wer Mana
agement
Battery ttemperature is monitored by the SIM
M module an
nd charging current is aadjusted to ensure
e optim
mum
charging
g.
An exterrnal load (e.g
g. radio or modem)
m can b
be supplied for
f a user co onfigurable ti me (Externa
al Load Time
e) of
up to 14440 minutes after
a loss of AC
A supply be
efore automaatically shutting down to cconserve batteries.
In the ca
ase of a prolo o AC supplyy, the Relay Module, SIM
onged loss of M module andd External Lo oad will be shut
s
down in an orderly fashion. On restoration of auxiliary supply, they
y will be auttomatically re
estored to th
heir
normal ooperating con
ndition. See also Section
n 4.8.5 Extern
nal Load.

4.8.4.1 Operatin
ng States
The Pow
wer Supply has five opera
ating states a
as described
d in the table below.

Conttroller Description
D
Sttate
Runnin
ng Thee Power Supp ply is in this sta
ate when eitheer the auxiliary
y supply or baattery is conne
ected with the
batttery voltage above
a the Shu utdown (2) level.
Pro
otection is opeerational.

OSM User Ma
anual RC Control
C 45
NOJA
A-5002-08

Conttroller Description
D
Sttate
Powerring Thee Power Supp ply has receive
ed a messagee that the syste
em is powerin g down.
Down Da
ata is saved to non-volatile m
memory by thee controller during this periood.
After the controller has powere
ed down it entters the Powered Down statte.
Standb
by Thee Power Supp ply enters this mode when th he Auxiliary su upply is off annd the battery is below the
use
er set capacity Power Down (1) Threshold.
y level or the P
This state will ch
hange to Contrroller Running g if the auxiliarry supply is resstored, or the battery
voltage rises aboove the Powerr Down (1) Threshold.
This state will ch
hange to Contrroller Powered d Down (Batte ery supply beloow the Power Down (1)
Threshold and auxiliary supplyy is off) after 5 minutes or if the battery is disconnected d.
Powerred Thee Power Supp ply enters this mode if the auxiliary supply y is off and thee battery switc
ch is off (or the
e
Down batttery voltage is
s below the Shhutdown (2) Thhreshold).
Pro
otection is not operational inn this state.
This state will ch
hange to Contrroller Running g if either the auxiliary
a suppl y or battery is
s restored. The e
batttery voltage must
m be abovee the Power Down (1) Thresh hold.
This state will ch
hange to Contrroller Standby y if the battery has been resttored with a voltage below
e Power Down
the n (1) Threshold but above thee Shutdown (2) Threshold annd there is no auxiliary
sup
pply.
Five m
minutes If th
he controller is
s in the Powerred Down statte, it can be re estored tempoorarily to the Standby state
Grace by turning the ba attery off, then
n ON again. To e Real Time Cllock settings this
o maintain the t should be
don ne within 60 seconds.
(1)
The e controller wiill be allowed tto run for 5 minutes if the baattery is below
w the Power Down
D
(2)
Threshold level (or( until the baattery fails ). This allows th he system to bbe operated fo or a few
min nutes with a flat battery.
Notes:
1. The Power Down
D Thresholld is 10.5V
2. The Battery fail
fa or Shutdow
wn Threshold iis 9.6V.

4.8.5 Exte
ernal Loa
ad Supplly Timer and Con
ntrolled O
Output
The exte ernal load tim
mer starts to
o time down when there is a loss of auxiliary AC
C supply. It shuts down the
external load when the timer expires. Supp ply is autom
matically restored and thhe timer is reset,
r when the
auxiliaryy AC supply is restored.
The extternal load supply can be cycled off, then on again, at regular inttervals to re eset conneccted
communnications equ
uipment. This
s feature can
n be disabled
d by setting th
he External LLoad Reset Time
T to zero.
If batteryy supply is lo
ost or is disc
connected, th
he external looad supply will
w continue to operate usingu AC sup pply
but with reduced cap pacity. Drawiing more thaan 15W on average
a over a rolling 60 seconds win ndow will cau
use
the exterrnal load sup pply to shut down
d and it w
will turn back
k on when ba attery supplyy is restored. Drawing more
m
than 15W W in this instance may ca ause the RC to shutdown n and restart in some casses.

4.9 Saving of Setting


gs
All settin
ngs are saved
d to non-vola
atile memoryy.
Setting cchanges from
m any source
e (Panel, CM
MS, SCADA, I/O, Relay In
nputs or Logicc) are saved
d as follows:
• A single setting change is saved afte r 15 seconds s.
• CConsequent setting chan nges are savved in 15 seccond intervalss
• AAll settings are
a saved wh hen the paneel is turned offf manually or
o after five m
minutes of pa
anel inactivityy
• ““Save System m Data” from
m the Main M
Menu is selec cted
• AAt 6 hourly in
ntervals
ecent entries may be lost if there is a sudden unex
Some re xpected shuttdown of the controller.

46 RC Control OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

5 Measurement
The SIM Module accepts the signals from the CVT and CT outputs in the OSM tank and transfers them
through to the Relay Module after filtering and scaling the signals.
The Relay Module converts the analogue signals received from the SIM Module into data as indicated in the
table below.
The measurement data is filtered for harmonic content and the RMS value of the fundamental signal is used
by Protection and Indication applications as shown in the table.
For User Configurable Analogue Values please refer to Section 5.6.
Measured Applicability
Measured value Designation Resolution
range Protection Indication
Phase currents Ia, Ib, Ic 0 – 16000 A 1A 9 9
(1)
Residual current In 0 – 16000 A 1A 9 9
Residual Current (0.2A SEF In 0 – 16000 A 0.1 A 9 9
(2)
model)
Phase to earth voltages Ua, Ub, Uc, Ur, Us, Ut 0.5 – 22 kV 0.1 kV 9 9
Line to line voltages Uab, Ubc, Uca, Urs, Ust, Utr 0.5 – 38 kV 0.1 kV 9 9
Positive sequence current I1 0 – 16000 A 1A 9 –
Negative sequence current I2 0 – 16000 A 1A 9 9
Positive sequence voltage U1 0.5 – 38 kV 0.1 kV 9 –
Negative sequence voltage U2 0.5 – 38 kV 0.1 kV 9 –
(3)
Residual voltage Un 0.5 – 22 kV 0.1 kV 9 –
o o
Phase shift between positive A1 0 – 359 1 9 –
sequence voltage and
current
o o
Phase shift between A2 0 – 359 1 9 –
negative sequence voltage
and current
o o
Phase shift between residual A0 0 – 359 1 9 –
voltage and current
Single and three phase total, A, B & C kVA / kW / kVAr 0 – 65535 1 – 9
active and reactive power 3 phase kVA / kVAr / kW
Single and three phase total, A, B & C +/– kVAh 0 – 999999999 1 – 9
active and reactive energy A, B & C +/- kWh
related to forward and
reverse power flow A, B & C +/– kVArh
directions 3 phase +/– kVAh
3 phase +/– kWh
3 phase +/– kVArh
Frequency from ABC and Fabc, Frst 46 – 65 Hz 0.01 Hz 9 9
RST recloser sides
(4)
Phase sequence from ABC Phase seq. ABC / ACB / ? NA – 9
and RST sides RST / RTS / ?
(4)

Single phase and three Power factor: 3phase, A 0 – 1 0.01 – 9


(5)
phase power factor phase, B phase, C phase
Notes:
1. Residual current is equal to three times the zero sequence current.
2. Switchgear model with matched CTs to provide 0.2A SEF sensitivity.
3. Residual voltage is equal to three times the zero sequence voltage.
4. “?” is displayed when any phase voltage drops below 0.5 kV.
5. Signed Power Factor is determined by the quadrant the angle between voltage and current is in and is
dependent on the power flow direction. It is not dependent on the torque angle.
Real time instantaneous measurements can be viewed on the Panel as shown below:

OSM User Manual Measurement 47


NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation MEASUREMENTS


>Power< 1 Phase Energy
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS]
Other 3 Phase Energy
ª [Measurements] ⇒
Voltages (kV):
A 6.2 B 6.2 C 6.2
R 6.2 S 6.2 T 6.2

AB 10.7 BC 10.7 CA 10.7


RS 10.7 ST 10.7 TR 10.7

Currents (A):
A 200 B 200 C 200
N 0 I2 0

Note: For 3 Phase SEF models, the measured neutral current is reported with a resolution of 0.1 A.

5.1 Sampling and Filtering


A sigma-delta analogue to digital converter operating at a sample rate of 409kHz eliminates the need to have
a high order low pass filter at the front end, this reduces phase shift and distortion over the full temperature
range.
Current and voltage channels are sampled 32 times during each power frequency cycle. Each current
measurement has a low and high coefficient applied and the measurement algorithm selects the appropriate
value to provide best resolution for each sample.
First harmonic RMS values for phase and residual currents together with zero, negative and positive
sequence voltages are calculated 16 times per cycle by application of digital filtering algorithms using the last
32 samples. The resultant fundamental RMS values are utilised by protection and indication elements.
RMS values for active and reactive power / energy values, power frequency, power direction and phase
sequence are calculated once per cycle.
Metering and display values are updated every 16 cycles.

5.2 Measurement Settings


Current sensing is carried out by Current Transformers (CTs). Voltage sensing is by means of Capacitive
Voltage Transformers (CVTs). An individual calibration coefficient is determined for each of the six voltage
channels received from the OSM. These six measurement coefficients and the OSM serial number are also
entered by the user.
The system frequency is detected automatically by the RC when it is first installed and powered up. The
system frequency is then saved into permanent memory.
Phase Configuration allows a customer the capability to re-configure default phase designations, according
to their own line connections to the Recloser. All measurements, indicators, records, protection settings and
counters operate according to the new phase designations.
All user settings can be changed from the Panel. Alternatively they can be transferred using the CMS
software package.

48 Measurement OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] ⇒ MEASUREMENT SETTINGS

Ø System Voltage (kV) 38.0


[MAIN MENU] LSD Level (kV) 2.0

ª [System Settings]
ª [Measurement Settings] ⇒

Measurement Settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


System Voltage (kV) U_rated 3.0 -38.0kV 0.1kV 38
LSD Level (kV) LSD Level 0.5 – 6.0kV 0.1kV 2
Note: The system voltage is defined as the phase to phase voltage of the system the recloser is connected to – not
the phase to ground voltage.

5.3 Switchgear Configuration


In the switchgear configuration menu, you can configure the phase configuration and power flow direction.
The “LL Allow Close” option is only visible if “Factory Settings” is enabled (refer to section 8.1.3). By default,
“LL Allow Close” is Off, which means when “Live Line” is On, a close will be blocked (refer to section 6.1.9).

Panel Navigation SWITCHGEAR CONFIGURATION


[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] ⇒
Ø Phase Configuration ABC
[MAIN MENU] Power Flow Direction RST to ABC
LL Allow Close Off
ª [System Settings]
ª [Switchgear Configuration] ⇒

Switchgear Configuration Settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Phase Configuration Phase Configuration ABC/ACB/BCA/CAB/BAC/CBA NA ABC
Power Flow Direction1 Power Flow Direction “RST to ABC”/”ABC to RST” NA RST to ABC
LL Allow Close LL Allow Close On/Off Off
Note:
1. When Power Flow Direction is configured as “RST to ABC”, forward positive sequence powerflow direction in
the OSM tank is from the RST side to the ABC side and reverse positive sequence poweflow direction is from
the ABC side to RST side.

OSM User Manual Measurement 49


NOJA-5002-08

5.4 Switchgear Calibration


Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] ⇒
Ø SWITCHGEAR CALIBRATION

ª [MAIN MENU] OSM Model OSM 38-16-800-300


ª [Systems Settings] Switchgear Type 3 Phase
Serial Number 0200111020003
ª [Switchgear Calibration] ⇒
Switchgear Coefficients:

A/kA A/MV A/MV


CIa 0.4000 CUa 0.0157 CUr 0.0157
CIb 0.4000 CUb 0.0157 CUs 0.0157
CIc 0.4000 CUc 0.0157 CUt 0.0157
CIn 0.4000

Switchgear Calibration

Title Designation Range Resolution


Switchgear Type1 Switchgear 3 Phase, 3 Phase SEF2, 1 NA
Type Phase, Single Triple
Serial number 3 OSM 13 character serial number
4
Ia calibration coefficient CIa 0.0 – 1.5999 A/kA 0.0001 A/kA
Ib calibration coefficient CIb 0.0 – 1.5999 A/kA 0.0001 A/kA
Ic calibration coefficient CIc 0.0 – 1.5999 A/kA 0.0001 A/kA
In calibration coefficient CIn 0.0 – 1.5999 A/kA 0.0001 A/kA
Ua calibration coefficient CUa 0.0 – 0.0627 A/MV 0.0001 A/MV
Ub calibration coefficient CUb 0.0 – 0.0627 A/MV 0.0001 A/MV
Uc calibration coefficient CUc 0.0 – 0.0627 A/MV 0.0001 A/MV
Ur calibration coefficient CUr 0.0 – 0.0627 A/MV 0.0001 A/MV
Us calibration coefficient CUs 0.0 – 0.0627 A/MV 0.0001 A/MV
Ut calibration coefficient CUt 0.0 – 0.0627 A/MV 0.0001 A/MV
Notes:
1. Different SIM modules are used depending on the switchgear type connected to it. Please refer to section 10.5
Spare Parts List .
2. Switchgear model with matched CTs to provide 0.2A SEF sensitivity. Refer to section 2.2.4 Protection Accuracy.
3. The Serial number defines the OSM Model and Switchgear Type. It is important that the correct serial number is
entered.
4. OSM sensor settings programmed into the RC when sent from the factory will be correct for the OSM whose
serial number is also programmed.

50 Measurement OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

5.5 Real Time Clock (RTC) settings


The Real Time Clock provides measurement of real date/time for all elements with 1ms resolution. The
clock is powered directly from the battery and, once set, date and time only requires adjustment if the battery
has been disconnected or turned off with no auxiliary supply connected to the RC cubicle.

Title Designation Settings Factory Default


Date Date In accordance with selected NA
format
Time Time In accordance with selected NA
format
Date format Date fmt DD/MM/YY or MM/DD/YY DD/MM/YY
Time format Time fmt 12 hours/24 hours 12 hours
Time Zone Time Zone (GMT) -12:00 to +12:00 hours 0:00
Note: 12 hour format displays (eg) 09:12:14pm; 24 hour format displays (eg) 21:12:14

Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] ⇒
Ø REAL TIME CLOCK SETTINGS

ª [MAIN MENU] Date: 25/01/2013


ª [Systems Settings] Time: 14:12:10

ª [RTC Settings] ⇒ Date Format dd/mm/yyyy


Time Format 24 Hour
Time Zone (hr) +00:00

5.6 User Configurable Analogue Values


User configurable analogues enable the addition of a new scale and offset to existing measured values such
as current, voltage and power. The configurable analogue values are calculated as follows:
Configurable Analogue Value = (Analogue Value Measured * Scale Factor) + Offset1
The analogue values can be configured through CMS and are displayed on the operator panel. The user can
add a name of up to 8 characters to define the analogue both through the panel and CMS. The analogue
will use the full resolution available but the displayed value will be signed whole values up to 7 digits. If the
values are out of range or invalid ‘???’ will be displayed2. The analogues can be used with any of the
protocols.

Panel Navigation Other


[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ Page 1 ►Page 2◄

ª [Measurements] Analogue
1 2 3 4
ª [Other] Vab Vbc Vca ___
27800 27800 27800 0
ª [Page 2] ⇒
5 6 7 8
___ VAsec VBsec VCsec
0 110 110 110

9 10 11 12
___ ___ ___ ___

0 0 0 0

OSM User Manual Measurement 51


NOJA-5002-08

Units 3
Measured value Designation Resolution

Currents Ia, Ib, Ic, In A 0.0625A


4
In_WT1_average, In_WT2_average A 0.0156A
Voltages Ua, Ub, Uc, Ur, Us, Ut, Uab, Ubc, Uca, Urs, Ust, Utr V 0.125V
Total, active and reactive power A, B & C kVA / kW / kVAr VA, W, VAr 1
3 phase kVA / kW / kVAr VA, W, VAr
Single and three phase total, active and A, B & C +/– kVAh, kWh, kVArh kVAh, kWh, kVArh 1
reactive energy related to forward and 3 phase +/– kVAh, kWh, kVArh kVAh, kWh, kVArh
reverse power flow directions
-19
Power Factor A, B, C PF 1 2
Frequency Fabc, Frst Hz 0.01Hz
st
Harmonic Ua, Ub, Uc 1 Harmonic V 1V
Ua Ub Uc Harmonic (n=2…15), Ua Ub Uc THD % 0.00001%
Ia Ib Ic In Harmonic (n=2….15) A 0.125A
Ia Ib Ic In TDD % 0.00001%

Note:
1. The Configurable Analogue Value is converted to an integer. The result is rounded up for any fractional values
>= 0.5 and round down for any fractional values < 0.4. When a large scaling factor is used and there is no
signal, user analogue values may still be reported due to noise.
2. The scaling range is -2E32 to +2E32 and the offset range is -2E32 to +2E32.
3. Subject to measurement accuracy in 2.2.2.
4. Windowing algorithm which is used to obtain moving average values of In where WT1’s averaging window is
configurable from 1 to 50 cycles (default is 15 cycles) and WT2’s averaging window is configurable from 1 to 10
times WT1’s window (default is 10). WT1 and WT2’s averaging windows are configurable via SGA.
In_WT1_average, In_WT2_average are the resultants of In calculated over the defined averaging window and
are provided as analogue values in logic and SGA. As an example they are used in an SGA application for
monitoring change in residual current for increased reliability and precision.

5.7 Last Good Value Trapped (LGVT)


LGVT records the last known good value of load current through each phase (Ia, Ib, Ic) and makes it
available as a SCADA point.
LGVT is calculated as 1 minute average value of measured current in each phase. It is frozen at its previous
1-minute average value whenever the current is at 0A or when Loss of Supply (LSD) is detected.
LGVT is implemented as DNP3 Analogue Input Points and as IEC 60870-5-101/104 Measured Values. Refer
to the relevant protocol implementation user manual for further details.

52 Measurement OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

6 Protection
Four individual groups of Protection Settings are available. Each group has the following protection
functions:
• Overcurrent (OC)
• Negative Phase Sequence (NPS)
• Earth Fault (EF)
• Sensitive Earth Fault (SEF)
• Live Line Overcurrent (LL)
• Under/Over Voltage (UV/OV)
• Under/Over Frequency (UF/OF)
• Loss of Supply Detection (LSD)
• Voltage Reclosing Control (VRC)
• Automatic Backfeed Restoration (ABR)
• Harmonic Protection (HRM).
Descriptions with up to 40 characters or numbers can be assigned for each of the protection groups using
the CMS software package.
Group 1 – 4 settings
Title Designation Range
Group name Group name Up to 40 English alphabet letters or digits from 0 to 9

6.1 Overcurrent Protection


Individual phase currents measured by the current transformers on the OSM are monitored for Overcurrent
(OC) and Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) protection. Residual current measured at the star point of the
Current transformers on the OSM is monitored for Earth Fault (EF) protection.
OC, NPS and EF have three overcurrent protection elements for each of the forward and reverse powerflow
directions. These allow time current characteristics to be matched across three zones of protection to meet
co-ordination requirements.
A Directional Element provides effective protection in ring feed or back feed situations while maintaining co-
ordination.
The Auto Reclosing element is responsible for the reclosing sequence associated with OC, NPS, EF and
SEF. Global settings can be applied to the reclosing element including Zone Sequence Co-ordination (ZSC),
Reclose times, Reset Time and Loss of Supply Reclosing Mode (LSRM).
The Auto Reclosing Map is used to set independent OC, NPS and EF parameters to define the operations in
a reclose sequence.
Cold Load Pickup (CLP) and Inrush Restraint (IR) elements allow effective customising of protection to
match system characteristics. IR does not apply to NPS elements.
The Temporary Time Adder provides a way to achieve fault clearing where a series of Reclosers on a feeder
have the same Time Current Characteristic by automatically applying a grading margin time on auto reclose.

OSM User Manual Protection 53


NOJA
A-5002-08

6.1.1 Prottection Elements


E s for OC, NPS and
d EF
OC, NPS S and EF ha ave three oveercurrent pro
otection elem
ments for eac
ch of the forw
ward and rev
verse powerfflow
direction
ns and a directional eleme
ent:
• O
OC1, NPS1, EF1
SSequence Master
M time delayed elem ments, for forw
ward powerflow direction (OC1+, NPS S1+, EF1+) and
a
ffor reverse powerflow direction (O OC1-, NPS1-, EF1-). Used to set the maximum numberr of
ooperations to
o lockout and me delayed protection ope
d provide tim erations in a reclose sequ
uence.
• O
OC2, NPS2, EF2
Low set elemments, for forward powerrflow directio
on (OC2+, NP PS2+, EF2+ ) and for rev verse powerfflow
ddirection (OC
C2-, NPS2-, EF2-). Can be used to provide a fas st fuse clearring, first ope
eration or a first
f
sstage Time Current Cha aracteristic (T
TCC) elemeent. Low set elements arre equipped with Maxim mum
ccurrent modiification mod
de to allow a fuse burning
g strategy to be implemennted.
• O
OC3, NPS3, EF3
High set elem
ments, for foorward powerrflow directio
on (OC3+, NPS3+, EF3+ +) and for rev
verse powerfflow
d
direction (OC
C3-, NPS3-, EF3-). High h set elemen nts are used
d to minimisse exposure of downstreeam
e
equipment too high fault currents.
c
• DE OC, DE NPS, DE EF
F
Directional elements
e pro
ovide a meanns of enablin
ng or disablin
ng directionaal protection for each of the
ssix OC, NPS S and EF elem
ments respe
ectively.
Note:
• IIf DE is not enabled for a particular e
element then the element will respond to both forw
ward and reve
erse
oovercurrent an
nd operate on the magnitud
de of the fault only.
o

6.1.2 Prottection Settings


S ffor OC, NPS
N and EF
The forw
ward and revverse master and low seet elements (OC1+, OC11-, NPS1+, NNPS1-, EF1+ +, EF1-, OCC2+,
OC2-, NNPS2+, NPS S2- and EF2+, EF2-) can n be set witth a Time Current
C Charracteristic (TCC) type. TCC
T
are selected and can be modified fo r each of the
curves a e OC, NPS and EF elemments indepe endently. So
ome
configura
ations must be
b done thro
ough the CMS S software.
The Pan nel Setting la everse direction OC, NP
ayout for forrward and re PS and EF eelements is identical and
d is
illustrate
ed below for the
t OC1+ ele ement using the IEC I curve as an ex
xample.

GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ►OC1+◄ OC2+ OC3
3+ OC1- OC2-
O OC3-
Ø
TCC Ty
ype IEC I
[MAIN M
MENU] Pickup
p Current (A) 300
ª [Groups Settings]
S Time Multiplier
M 0.50
um Current Multiplier
Minimu 1.00
ª [G
Group 1…4] Defini
ite Minimumm Time (s) 00.00
ª Protection Settinggs: [OC] Maximu
um Trippingg Time (s) 120.00
Additi
ional Time (s) 0.00
OC1+] ⇒
ª [O Fault Reset Timee (s) 0.05

Notes:
• A pickup du ue to an EF element ca an be blocke ed if the corrresponding ““Block” data
apoint is set via
L
Logic, I/O orr SGA e.g. iff Block P(EF
F-) is set via SGA then piickups and pprotection opperations duee to
E
EF1-, EF2- and
a EF3- willl be blocked..
• The High set elements can only be sset to definite
e time charac
cteristics.

54 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

6.1.3 Time
e Curren
nt Charac
cteristic (TCC) Se
ettings
Twelve sstandard AN
NSI and IEC Inverse Deffinite Minimu
um Time (IDMT) curves are always available in the
RC-10 a
as well as De
efinite Time (T
TD).
Up to ten
n additional curves
c can be gh CMS which can includee any of the 43 Non-
b made ava ilable throug
Standardd Curves and d any User Defined
D Curvve (UDC). Noon-Standard Curves are designed to emulate
curves aavailable in older protectio
on equipmennt and UDC curves
c allow customisatioon of standard IDMT
curves.
Configurration of Non
n-Standard and UDC curvves can only
y be done using CMS softftware.
For more
e information
n refer to Sec
ction 11.3.
Time currrent charactteristic (TCC) types
Title Designation
D Range Fa
actory Defaultt
Standaard Time curre
ent TCC
T Type ANSI: EI / VI / I / STI / STE
EI / LTEI / LTV
VI / LTI IEC
CI
characcteristic IEC: EI / VI / I / LTI
TD
Downloadable Time e current TCC: 101 10
02 103 104 10
05 106 107 11 1 112 NA
A
1
characcteristic 113 114 115
5 116 117 119 120 121 122 131
4 135 136 137 138 139 140 141
132 133 134
142 151 152
2 161 162 163 164 165
200 201 202
2
400 401 402
2
UDC

Definite time (TD) TC


CC settings for
f Master an
nd Low Set Elements
E
The follo
owing setting
gs are the TD
D settings wh
hich can be applied
a to the
e master andd low set elem
ments.
Title Designation
D Range
R Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Pickup
p current (A) – master Ip
p 3 – 1280A 1A 300
0
elements
Pickup
p Current (A) – low set Ip
p 3 – 16000A 1A 300
0
elements
Trippin
ng time (s) Tdt
T min, s 0 – 120s 0.01s 1.0
00
Fault rreset time (s) FLTRes,
F s 0 – 10s 0.01s 0.0
05

ANSI an
nd IEC TCC settings
s for Master
M and L
Low Set Elem
ments
The follo
owing setting
gs are the ANSI
A and IE
EC settings which can be applied tto the mastter and low set
elementss. These setttings also ap
pply to the 43
3 Non Standa
ard Curves and
a UDC currves.
Title Designation
D Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Pickup
p current (A) – master Ip
p 3 – 1280A 1A 300
0
elements
Pickup
p Current (A) – low set Ip
p 3 – 16000A
A 1A 300
0
elements
Time m
multiplier TM
T 0.01 – 15 0.01 0.5
50
1
Minimum current mu
ultiplier MIN
M 1 – 20 0.01 1.0
00
Definitte minimum tim
me (s) Tmin,
T s 0 – 10s 0.01s 0.0
00
Maxim
mum tripping time (s) Tmax,
T s 1 – 120s 0.01s 120
0.00
Additio
onal time (s) Ta,
T s 0 – 2s 0.01s 0.0
00
Fault rreset time2 (s) FLTRes,
F s 0 – 10s 0.01s 0.0
05
Notes:
et as a multiplle of the picku
1. se up current (Ip) setting
2. not applicable for
f ANSI TCC C whose reset timer simulate
es a rotating disk
d reset charracteristic.

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 55
NOJA
A-5002-08

Maximum
m Current Mode Settings
s for Low Sett Elements
Maximum m current mode
m is designed to alloow a fuse burning
b strate
egy to be immplemented. When currrent
exceedss a user set maximum
m the trip operattion timer fre urrent drops back below that level. This
eezes until cu T
extends the tripping time
t to avoid
d nuisance trripping during g operation of
o downstreaam fuses.
Each ele
ement can be
e independently set for m
maximum currrent modifyin
ng mode.
For ANS SI, IEC and UDC TCC’s the maximu s calculated using a mul tiplier applie
um current is ed to the pickkup
current.
m Current modification mode
Maximum m available for the low set elements.
is only a e

Title Desig
gnation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Maxim
mum Current Mode
M MAX m
mode Ena
able / Disable NA D
1
Maxim
mum Current Multiplier
M ImaxM
M 1.1 – 10 0.01 5.0
00
Note 1: T
This setting is displayed on the
t RC panel when Maximu
um Current Mo
ode is enabledd.

Definite Time Setting


gs for High Set
S Elements
The high
h set elements can only be
b set to a de
efinite time characteristic
c c using the seettings below
w:

Title Designation
D Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Pickup
p current (A) Ip 3 – 16000
0A 1A 10
000
Trippin
ng time (s) Td
dt Min, s 0 – 2s 0.01s 0.1
10
Fault rreset time (s) FL
LTRes, s 0 – 10s 0.01s 0.0
05

6.1.4 TCC
C modifie
ers
Each AN
NSI or IEC Tiime Current Characteristtic can be mo
odified with th
he aid of thee following op
perators:
• d
definite minimmum time (T Tmin)
Defines the minimum
m tim
me that the de
evice can op
perate. By default this is sset to 0s. This may be ussed
tto define dessired behavioour when an IDMT curve intersects a high set currve.

• maximum tripping time (T


Tmax)
Defines the maximum
m tim
me that the d
device can op
perate. By de
efault this is sset to 120s.
• minimum current multiplier (MIN)
• urrent multiplier (MAX)
maximum cu
• a
additional tim
me (Ta)
A
Adds a consstant time to the
t selected TCC curve. By default th
his is set to 00s.

• ffault reset tim


me (FLTRes))
Defines the time
t after wh
hich a pickup
p is no longerr active before the protecction timer re
esets.

56 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

The figure below illusstrates the effect of the m


modifying ope
erators on a TCC curve.
3
T

2 where:
Ip Picckup current
Protection AX∗Ip
Imax MA
operating
Imin MIN
N*Ip
zone
Tmax 1 Origginal TCC (witho
out modification
ns)
1 2 TCC
C with additionall time (Ta) only
Tmin 3 TCC
C with all modific
cations applied.

Ta

Ip Imin Imax I

Note: Ma
aximum curren
nt modification
n is only appliccable for the lo
ow set overcurrrent elementss (OC2+, OC2
2-, NPS2+,
NPS
S2-, EF2+, EF
F2-).
The figuures below illlustrate the effect of ussing definite minimum time (Tmin) ffor an IDMT
T curve when it
intersectts a high set element curve.
IDMT Curve

T T High set C
Curve

Tmin = 0.1s

Ip I Ip I

min = 0s Tm
Tm min = 0.1s Tmin = 0.1ss

6.1.5 Sensitive Ea
arth Faul t (SEF)
Sensitive
e Earth Fau ult protection monitors residual current measu ured at the star point of the Currrent
Transforrmers in the OSM.
O SEF protection
p co mprises two Overcurrentt elements annd a Directio
onal element.
One ove ement is for forward pow
ercurrent ele wer flow dire
ection (SEF+) and the otther for reve
erse power flow
f
n (SEF–). Each element can be p rogrammed with an ind
direction dependent D Definite timee TCC and the
Direction
nal Element allows
a enabling or disablling of SEF+ and SEF– as
a required.

Panel Na
avigation GROUP
P 1 SENSITI
IVE EARTH FAULT
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
►SEF+◄ SEF-
Ø [[MAIN MENU]
ª [Grou
ups Settings]] Pickup Current
C (A
A) 1
15
Tripping
g Time (s) 10.0
00
ª [Group 1…
…4] Fault Reset Time (s) 0.0
05
ª Protection
P Settings: [SEF]] ⇒

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 57
NOJA
A-5002-08

SEF– settingss1,2
SEF+, S
Title Designatio
on Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
1
Pickup
p Current (A) Ip 1 – 80A 0.5A 15
5
0.2 – 80.0A3 0.1A 15
5
Trippin
ng Time (s) Tdtt Min, s 0 – 120s 0.01ss 10
0.00
Fault R
Reset Time (ss) FLT
TRes, s 0 – 10s 0.01 0.0
05

Note:
1. A pickup due to an SEF ele ement can be bblocked if the corresponding g “Block” dataapoint is set via
a Logic, I/O orr
S
SGA e.g. if Bllock P(SEF+) is set via SGA
A then pickups s and protecttion operation ns due to SEF F+ will be
b
blocked.
2. S
Sensitive Eartth Fault uses the
t Definite Tiime TCC curv ve.
3. S
Switchgear model
m with matc
ched CTs to p
provide 0.2A SEF
S sensitivity
y.

6.1.6 Brok
ken Conductor
Detection of open circuit faults in overhead lines and underground cables can be facilitated using Brokken
Conducttor protection n (46BC) which uses th he ratio of negative
n seqquence curreent over pos sitive sequen
nce
current ((I2/I1 ratio). The I2/I1 ra
atio is relativvely constant with variations of loadd current and
d thus for op
pen
circuit fa
aults it provid
des more se ensitive prote ection than purely using negative phhase sequen nce overcurrrent
(NPS).

GROUP 1 NEGATIV
VE PHASE SEQUENCE
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] NPS ►I2/I1◄
Ø
I2/I1 (Broken Con ductor):
[MAIN M
MENU]
ª [Groups Settings]
S I2/I1 Mode D
Pickup Value
V (%) 20
0
ª [G
Group 1…4] Minimum I2 (A) 15
ª Protection Settinggs: [NPS] Tripping Time 10.00
0

ª [II2/I1] ⇒
I2/I1 setttings

Title Designatio
on Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
I2/I1 M
Mode I2/I1 ratio operatiion D/L/A - D
Pickup
p Value (%) Pickup value for I2/I1, % 10 – 100 1 20
Minimum I2 (A) Minnimum negativve 3 – 1280 1 15
phaase sequence current
leve
el, A
Trippin
ng Time (s) Tdtt min, s 0 – 120.00 00.01 10.00

Notes:
• F
For I2/I1 to op
perate:
o Both Protection an nd NPS globall settings mus
st be ON.
o At least one phase e current mustt be above 3A
A.
• F
Fault reset tim
me fixed at 50m
ms.

58 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

6.1.7 Dire
ectional Overcurr
O rent Elem
ments
Direction
nal elementss provide a means
m of ena
abling or disa
abling directio
onal protectioon for each of the OC, NPS
N
EF and SSEF elementts.
When th he Directiona
al Element (DDE) is enab led for any protection
p element, the pprotection ellement will only
o
respond to faults in the element’s designate ed direction. For example e, OC1+ wouuld only resp pond to forw
ward
faults, an
nd OC1- wou uld only resp
pond to reverrse faults, pro
ovided DE is
s enabled forr both of them
m.
If DE is not enabledd for a particular elemeent then the element will respond too both forwa
ard and reve
erse
overcurrrent and operrate on the magnitude
m off the fault onlly.
ectional funcction for Phase Overcu rrent, Earth Fault, Sens
The Dire sitive Earth Fault and Negative
N Pha
ase
n is provided by the directtional elements, DE OC, DE EF, DE S
Sequencce protection SEF and DEE NPS.
The torqque angle set by the user is used to ddetermine fo orward and reverse zonees for the fau ult. If the pha
ase
angle (aangle betwee en the polaris
sing voltage , Upol and op d zone then the
perating currrent Iop) is inn the forward
fault is in the forwaard direction else the fa e reverse direction. Thee torque angle can be set
ault is in the
separateely for each set
s of protecttion elementss.
The phase angle is defined
d as follows for the different ele
ements:
OC angle between
b po sitive seque sing voltagee and positive sequen
ence polaris nce
operating current
EF, SEF angle between zero
o sequence polarising voltage andd zero sequence operatting
current
NPS angle be
etween nega ative phase sequence
s po
olarising voltaage and neg
gative sequen
nce
operating current.
For a de
etailed description of Directional Prote
ection refer to
o Appendix B – Directionnal Protection
n.
The directional elements can be set independ gh the Panel menu as illuustrated below for DE OC
dently throug C.
Panel Na
avigation
GRO
OUP 1 OC DI
IRECTIONAL ELEMENT
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Torque Angle (o ) 0
Ø
Direction Not Dettected Bloc
ck
[MAIN M
MENU] Dir Cha
ange Responnse Loc
ck
ª [Groups Settings]
S
DE Cont
trol Map:
ª [G
Group 1…4] OC1+ Disable
ed
OC2+ Disable
ed
ª Directtional Elemeents: [OC] ⇒
OC3+ Disable
ed
OC1- Disable
ed
OC2- Disable
ed
OC3- Disable
ed
Torque a
angle setting
g
Title Designatio
on Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
o o
Torque
e angle (o)(1)) Att 0 – 359 1 0
Directiion Not Detected(2) DN
ND Trip
p/Block NA Blo
ock
Dir Ch
hange Respon
nse Diir Change resp
ponse Loc
ck/Dynamic NA Lo
ock
Notes:
o
• When the torrque angle is 0 and the P Power Flow Diirection is con
nfigured as “R
RST to ABC”, forward posiitive
ssequence pow werflow directtion in the OS SM tank is frrom the RST side to the A ABC side and
d reverse posiitive
ssequence powwerflow directiion is from the
e ABC side to RST side.
• When “Directiion Not Detec cted” is set to Trip the fastest curve of the
e directional eelements enab
bled will trip once
o
tthe fault reach
hes the pickup
p value.

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 59
NOJA-5002-08

Direction Not Detected


The “Direction Not Detected” setting determines whether the protection element enabled for directional
control will operate if the direction is not detected:
1. Block (Default)
Protection elements enabled for directional control will not respond to a fault if the direction is not
detected.

2. Trip
Protection elements enabled for directional control will respond to a fault when the direction is not
detected.

Direction Change Response


The “Dir Change Response” setting determines how the elements, enabled for directional control, behave
when the power flow direction changes while the protection timer is accumulating:
• Lock
When the direction (e.g. positive direction) is detected and a protection element e.g. OC1+ detects
the fault, the protection timer for OC1+ starts to accumulate. During this time, if the direction of
current changes and exceeds the pickup current of the opposite element e.g.OC1-, then OC1- will
not detect the fault and the protection timer continues to accumulate for OC1+.

• Dynamic
When the direction (e.g. positive direction) is detected and a protection element e.g. OC1+ detects
the fault, the protection timer starts to accumulate for OC1+. During this time, if the direction of
current changes and exceeds the pickup current of the opposite element e.g.OC1-, then the
protection timer resets and starts to accumulate for OC1-. The OC1+ pickup resets after the fault
reset time if the direction does not return back to the positive direction during the reset time.
Control Map Settings

Control Map Element Directional control Factory Default


DE OC
OC1+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
OC2+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
OC3+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
OC1- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
OC2- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
OC3- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
DE EF
EF1+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
EF2+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
EF3+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
EF1- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
EF2- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
EF3- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
DE NPS
NPS1+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
NPS2+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
NPS3+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
NPS1- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
NPS2- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
NPS3- Enabled/Disabled Disabled
DE SEF
SEF+ Enabled/Disabled Disabled
SEF – Enabled/Disabled Disabled

60 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-008

6.1.8 Adm
mittance
Neutral Admittance protection (21Yn)
( can be utilised to detect ea
arth faults i n high resis
stance earth
hed,
unearthe
ed and comppensated netw
works.

Neutral A t value of conductance


Admittance is based on the p of admitttance) and susceptance, Bn
e, Gn (real part
(imagina
ary part of ad
dmittance) where
w Yn=Gn d on settings for
n + jBn. Yn can be conffigured to opperate based
Gn, Bn or both. The Directiona al Mode for conductance
e and susce eptance can be configurred as forwa ard,
reverse o
or both.

The diaggram below shows the operating z one for Yn when Opera
ational Modee is set to “Gn
“ & Bn” and
a
Direction
nal Mode is set
s to “Bidirectional”.
Bn-S
Susceptance

Operating Op
perating
Zone Zone
Z

FWD
Susceptance

Gn-Condu
uctance
REV
Susceptance REV FWD
Conductannce Conductance
e
Noo Operation

Operating Operating
O
Zone Zone

GROUP 1 Y
Yn ADMITTAN
NCE
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Operational Mode Gn & Bn
B
Directional Mode Bi
idirectiona
al
N MENU]
Ø[MAIN
Minimum
m Un Multipplier 0.1
10
ª [Groups Settings]
S Minimum
m In (A) 1
10
ª [G
Group 1…4] Trippin
ng Time (s)) 1.0
00
Fault Reset
R Time (s) 0.0
05
ª Protection Settinggs: [Yn] ⇒ Forward
d Conductannce (mSi) +1.0
00
Reverse
e Conductannce (mSi) -1.0
00
Forward
d Susceptannce (mSi) +1.0
00
Reverse
e Susceptannce (mSi) -1.0
00

Admittan
nce Settings
Title Designatio
on Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
ode1
Yn Mo Yn Mode D/L/A/R/S/C C - D
Gn” / “Bn” / “G
“G Gn &
Opera
ational mode Op
perational mod
de - “Gn & Bn”
Bn”
“Foorward” / “Rev verse”
Directiional Mode2 Dirrectional Mode
e - “B
Bidirectional”
/ “Bidirectiona
al”
Trippin
ng Time (s) Tdtt Min, s 0 – 120.00 00.01 1.00
Min Unn Multiplier3 Min
n Un UM, 0.01 – 1 00.01 0.10
Minimum In (A)4 Min
n In , A 1 – 1280 0.5 10.0
Fault R
Reset Time (ss) FLT
TRes, s 0.00-10 00.01 0.05
Forwaard Susceptance Forrward Suscep
ptance
-327.00 to 327
7.00 00.01 1.00
(mSi) (mS
Si)
Reversse Susceptance Reverse Suscepptance
-327.00 to 327
7.00 00.01 -1.00
(mSi) (mS
Si)
Forwaard Conductan nce Forrward Conducctance
-327.00 to 327
7.00 00.01 1.00
(mSi) (mS
Si)
Reversse Conductan nce Reverse Conducctance
-327.00 to 327
7.00 00.01 -1.00
(mSi) (mS
Si)

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 61
NOJA
A-5002-08

Notes:
1. Yn can be coonfigured to op
perate based o on settings forr Gn, Bn or bo
oth.
2. The directional mode is based on the po ower flow direcction selected. See section 5.2 Measurem
ment Settings
3. ge equals Min
Pickup voltag n Un Multiplierr x U_rated / √3;√ where U_rrated is the raated system voltage
v entered in
the measurem ment settings (refer to sectioon 5.2).
4. Minimum resiidual current threshold
t for Y
Yn to be opera ational.

6.1.9 Live
e Line Ov
vercurren
nt (LL)
Live Line
e (LL) Overccurrent prote
ection consissts of ten non
n-directional Overcurrentt elements: three
t for OC
CLL,
NPSLL a and EFLL annd one for SEEFLL.
LL can b
be turned On n from the Protection
P Glo
obal Settings
s menu (refe
er to section 6.14) or from the Live Line
L
Fast Keyy on the pane
el. When LLL is turned O n:
• W
When a pro otection operration is inittiated, the device
d will trrip to Lockouut based on
n the Live Line
L
protection se
ettings (not SST).
S
• A close will be
b blocked iff “LL Allow C
Close” is configured as Off
O (which is tthe default setting). Refe
er to
ssection 5.3 Switchgear
S Configuration
C n.
Live Line Line Tag (Se
e Fast Key can also be linked to Hot L ee Section 6.6). When LLL and HLT arre linked:
• T
The LL On/O
Off fast key on
o the panel w
will also conttrol HLT.
• W
When a pro otection operration is inittiated, the device
d will trrip to Lockouut based on
n the Live Line
L
protection se
ettings (not SST).
S
• A
Any close op
perations are
e blocked.

Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] GROUP 1 LI
IVE LINE SE
ETTINGS

Ø
Eleme
ent Map
[MAIN M
MENU]
OCLL ►NPSLL◄ EFLL SEF
FLL
ª [Groups Settings]
S
ª [G
Group 1…4]
ª Prote gs: [LL] ⇒
ection Setting

[MAIN M
MENU]
GROUP 1 NEGATIV
VE SEQUENCE
E LIVE LINE
E
ª [Groups Settings]
S
ª [G
Group 1…4] ►NPSLL1
1◄ NPSLL2 NPSLL3

ª Prote
ection Setting
gs: [LL] TCC Typ
pe IEC I
NPSLL1] ⇒
ª NPSLL: [N Pickup Current (A
A) 3000
Time Multiplier 0.5
50
Minimum
m Current M
Multiplier 1.000
Definite Minimum Time (s) 0.000
Maximum
m Tripping Time (s) 120.000
Additio
onal Time (
(s) 0.000
Fault Reset
R Time (s) 0.005

62 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

OCLL1, NPSLL1, EFLL1 Settings1


Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default
2
TCC Type TCC Type UDC, TD NA IEC I
ANSI: EI / VI / I / STI /
STEI / LTEI / LTVI / LTI
IEC: EI / VI / I / LTI
TCC: 101 102 103 104
105 106 107 111 112
113 114 115 116 117
119 120 121 122 131
132 133 134 135 136
137 138 139 140 141
142 151 152 161 162
163 164 165
200 201 202
400 401 402

Pickup current (A)3 Ip 3 – 1280A 1A 300A


Time Multiplier TM 0.01 – 15 0.01 0.50
Minimum Current Multiplier MIN 1 – 20 0.01 1.00
Definite Minimum Time (s) Tmin ,s 0 – 10s 0.01s 0.00
Maximum Tripping Time (s) Tmax,s 1 – 120s 0.01s 120.00
Additional Time (s) Ta, s 0 – 2s 0.01s 0.00
Fault Reset Time (s) FLTRes, s 0 - 10s 0.01s 0.05s

OCLL2, NPSLL2, EFLL2 Settings1

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


TCC Type2 TCC Type UDC, TD NA TD
ANSI: EI / VI / I / STI /
STEI / LTEI / LTVI / LTI
IEC: EI / VI / I / LTI
TCC: 101 102 103 104
105 106 107 111 112
113 114 115 116 117
119 120 121 122 131
132 133 134 135 136
137 138 139 140 141
142 151 152 161 162
163 164 165
200 201 202
400 401 402
Pickup current (A)3 Ip 3 – 1280 A 1A 300A
Tripping time (s) Tdt Min, s 0 – 2s 0.01s 1.00
Maximum Current Mode Enable Max Current Enabled/Disabled Disabled
multiplier
Fault Reset Time (s) FLTRes, s 0 - 10s 0.01s 0.05s

OCLL3, NPSLL3 Settings1,4

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


TCC Type2 TCC Type TD NA TD
Pickup current (A)3 Ip 3 – 1280 A 1A 1000A
Tripping time (s) Tdt Min, s 0 – 2s 0.01s 0.20s
Fault Reset Time (s) FLTRes, s 0 - 10s 0.01s 0.05s

OSM User Manual Protection 63


NOJA-5002-08

EFLL3 Settings1,4
Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default
2
TCC Type TCC Type TD NA TD
Pickup current (A) Ip 1 – 1280 A 1A 1000A
Tripping time (s) Tdt Min, s 0 – 2s 0.01s 0.20s
Fault Reset Time (s) FLTRes, s 0 - 10s 0.01s 0.05s

SEFLL Settings1

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


2
TCC Type TCC Type TD NA TD
Pickup current (A) Ip 1 – 80A 1A 15A
0.2 – 80.0A5 0.1A 15.0A
Tripping time (s) Tdt Min, s 0 – 2s 0.01s 0.20s
Fault Reset Time (s) FLTRes, s 0 - 10s 0.01s 0.05s
Notes:
1. OCLL, EFLL, SEFLL and NPSLL elements are equipped with a 50ms reset timer.
2. For TCC type, please refer to Section 11.4. All curves can be applied to OCLL1-2, NPSLL1-2 and EFLL 1-2. Only the DT
curve can be applied to OCLL3, NPSLL3, EFLL3 and SEFLL. A maximum of 10 non-standard curves can be loaded into the
RC-10.
3. The timing accuracy is only guaranteed for I/Ip values < 1600.
4. When upgrading the firmware, prior settings of OCLL and EFLL from an earlier version will be copied to the OCLL3 and
EFLL3 element respectively.
5. A Switchgear model with matched CTs to provide 0.2A SEF sensitivity is available for all 3 phase and 2 phase tanks.

Live Line Element Maps


Panel Navigation
GROUP 1 LIVE LINE ELEMENT MAPS
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
Ø OCLL1 ►Disabled◄ EFLL1 Disabled
OCLL2 Disabled EFLL2 Disabled
[MAIN MENU]
OCLL3 Disabled EFLL3 Disabled
ª [Groups Settings]
ª [Group 1…4] NPSLL1 Disabled SEFLL Disabled
NPSLL2 Disabled
ª Protection Settings: [LL] NPSLL3 Disabled
ª Element Map ⇒

Live Line Element Map Settings

Element Setting Factory Default


OCLL1 Enable/Disable Disable
OCLL2 Enable/Disable Disable
OCLL3 Enable/Disable Enable
EFLL1 Enable/Disable Disable
EFLL2 Enable/Disable Disable
EFLL3 Enable/Disable Enable
NPSLL1 Enable/Disable Disable
NPSLL2 Enable/Disable Disable
NPSLL3 Enable/Disable Disable
SEFLL Enable/Disable Disable

64 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-008

6.1.10
0 Cold
d Load Pickup
P Ellement (C
CLP)
Restorin
ng supply to a feeder affter an exten nded outage e will often result
r in a hhigher than normal load as
thermosttat controlled
d loads (heaaters, air-con efrigerators, etc) will all ccome on at the same tim
nditioners, re me.
The exte
ent and durattion of the increased dem mand will deppend on the characteristic
c cs of the feeder load.
Cold Loa ad Pickup caaters for loss
s of load diveersity due to
o an extendeed outage byy increasing the Operatio onal
Cold Loa ad Multiplier (OCLM) from 1 to a use er set value (cold load multiplier)
m oveer a user se
et period of tiime
(Cold Looad recognition time). On nce supply iss restored thee OCLM retuurns to one oover a secon nd user set tiime
(Cold Looad Time). OCLM
O is rec
calculated evvery cycle and is not ap pplicable for OC3 (high set), EF (Ea arth
Fault), S
SEF (Sensitivve Earth Fault) and NPS (Negative Ph hase Sequen nce) elementts.
Provision n of variablee ramp rates for increasee and decrea
ase of the Op
perational Coold Load Mu
ultiplier provid
des
flexibilityy for differing system characteristics.
The CLPP element iss initiated by Loss of Sup pply Detectio
on (LSD) a condition
c deffined by voltts less than the
LSD leve
el on all thre
ee phases and current le ess than 3A on all three phases. Thhe LSD level is configura able
between
n 0.5kV and 6.0kV
6 (refer to
t section 6.8 upply Detecto
8 Loss of Su or (LSD)).
Operatio
on of the Cold
d Load Picku
up element iss illustrated in the diagrams below.
Cold Load Pickup when Losss of Supply is lonnger than the  Cold Load Pickup
C p when Loss of Su
upply is shorter 
cold load rrecognition time
e than the cold loa
t ad recognition time

Supplyy Supply
V < LSD V <  LSD
& I <  3 A & I <  3 A
t ime time

P ( LSD )   P ( LSD )  


1 1
ttime time
0 0

Timer  Timer 
1
1
N
ttime time
0 0
Trec Tcl < Trec N x Tcl
OCLM OCLM
CL
LM
N x CLM
1 1
time time
0 0

where: CLM co
old load multipllier P(LSD) Losss of Supply Deetector (LSD) element
e picku
up
OCLM op
perational cold
d load multiplie
er Trec cold load recognitition time
Tcl co
old load time (s
setting) N CLP timer readingg when supply y is restored

Panel menu layout fo


or Cold Load
d Protection ssettings is as
s follows.
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Ø
[MAIN M
MENU] GROUP 1 COLD LOAD PROTECTION

ª [Groups Settings]
S Cold Loa
ad Multipl ier 1.0
ª [G
Group 1…4] ad Time (m in)
Cold Loa 1
15
Cold Loa
ad Recognittion Time (min) 1
15
ª Otherr: [CLP] ⇒

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 65
NOJA
A-5002-08

Cold Loa
ad Pickup Se
ettings
Title De
esignation Rang
ge Ressolution Fa
actory Defaultt
Cold L
Load Multiplierr CLM 1–5 0.1 1.0
0
Cold L
Load Time (min) Tcl, m
min 1 – 400 min
m 1m
min 15
5
Cold L
Load Recognittion Time (min
n) Trec, min 0 – 60 min
n 1m
min 15
5

6.1.11 Inrush Restrraint (IR))


Whenevver a feeder is energised, even afte er short outa
ages causedd by an autoo reclose, th
here are inruush
currents associated with
w certain types
t of load
d causing hig
gher than normal loadingg. Examples are transform
mer
excitation current and motor startt current.
The inrush element applies
a a temmporary multtiplier to the level of picku
up current onn detection of
o loss of suppply
(refer to section 6.8) which is rammped back d down to one when
w the supply is resto red. “Inrush Restraint Tim
me”
determin nes how longg it takes for the multiplierr to be ramped down.
Inrush re
estraint is no
ot applicable for OC3 (higgh set phase overcurrent), Negative P ence (NPS), EF
Phase Seque
ault) or SEF (Sensitive Earth
(Earth Fa E Fault) p
protection ele
ements.
Appropriiate applicatiion of Inrush Restraint alllows protecttion co-ordina
ation the flexxibility to cop
pe with transiient
es in load currrent caused by inrush w ithout comprromising prottection sensiitivity.
increase
Operatio
on of the Inru
ush element is illustrated in the diagra
am below.

Supply
w
where IRM – Inrush Restraint
R Multiplilier
V < LSD
& I <  3 A
M
OIRM – Operatio
onal Inrush Resstraint Multiplier
time P(LSD
D) – Pickup signal
s derived frrom LSD element
0
Tir – Inrush Restraint
R Time
P ( LSD )
1

time
0

Timer 
1

Tir
time
0 3  cycles 
OIRM
M
IRM
1

time
0

Panel Na
avigation GROUP
G 1 INR
RUSH RESTRA
AINT
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Inrush Restraint Multiplier
r 5.
.0
Ø Inrush Restraint Time (s) 0.1
10
[MAIN M
MENU]
ª [Group Se
ettings]
ª [G
Group 1…4]
ª Otherr: [IR] ⇒
Inrush R
Restraint settiings
Title
e Des
signation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Inrush
h Restraint Multiplier IRM 1 – 20 0.1 05
5.0
Inrush
h Restraint Tim
me (s) Tir,s 0.01 – 10s 0.01s 0.1
10

66 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

6.1.12
2 Tem
mporary Time
T Add
dition (TT
TA)
The Temmporary Time Addition (TTA) elemeent can be used to achie
eve fault isoolation with series
s reclossers
program
mmed with the
e same Timee Current Ch aracteristic (TCC).
(
The principle of operration is that each recloseer opens in response
r to a fault. Voltaage Reclosin
ng Control (re
efer
to sectio
on 6.9) inhibitts reclose op
perations of d
downstream devices unle ess the upstrream device closes. TTA A is
used to eextend the trripping time when
w the devvice closes and
a no fault is detected.
TTA can n operate in two modes, continuouss or transien nt. In both modes,
m whenn the device e closes onto a
healthy ssection of the
e feeder and
d no fault is d
detected with
hin 3 cycles, TTA is addeed. If the dev
vice closes on
o a
fault then
n TTA is not added.
In contin
nuous mode,, TTA remain ns on until th
he device op
pens. In tran moved when the
nsient mode , TTA is rem
Auto Recclose reset time has expired.
added to the TCC low sett instantaneo
TTA is a ous elementss (OC2, NPSS2 and EF2) only and is not applicable if
those ele
ements are mapped
m to disable (D) in the reclose sequence.
Panel menu layout fo
or TTA settin
ngs is illustra ted below.
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Ø
GROUP
P 1 TEMPORA
ARY TIME AD
DDITION
[MAIN M
MENU]
ª [Groups Settings]
S Time Addition Mode
e t
Transient
Transient Addition
nal Time (s
s) 0.00
0
ª [G
Group 1…4]
ª Otherr: [TTA] ⇒
TTA setttings

Title
e Design
nation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Time A
Addition Mode
e TTA mod
de Tra
ansient/Continuous NA Tra
ansient
Transiient Additional Time (s) Tat,s 0 – 1s 0.01ss 0.0
00
Note:
• Voltage Reclo
osing Control (VRC)
( must be
e enabled for the TTA featu
ure to work. Reefer to section
n 6.9.

6.2 Au
uto Recllosing (A
AR OC//NPS/EF
F/SEF/Y
Yn)
The Recclosing elem
ment is responsible for reclosing se equences as ssociated wiith the Phas se Overcurre
ent,
Negative
e Phase Seqquence, Earth
h Fault, Senssitive Earth Fault
F and Admittance prootection elem
ments.
When AAuto Reclosin ng is active and
a a protecction trip occ curs, the devvice closes aafter the Reclose Time has h
passed. The sequen nce counter is then increemented and d the Reset Timer
T is starrted. If a fau
ult occurs witthin
the Rese et Time, the device will operate
o in acccordance with
w the next trip in the A AR reclose se equence. Wh hen
the Rese et Time expires the sequ uence counte er is reset to
o 1 and AR is ready to pperform its fu ull sequence.. A
user can
n configure separate
s reclose times fo
or each trip inn a reclose sequence andd the numbe er of trips beffore
the devicce goes to lo
ockout.
When AR R is enabled
d, if at any tim
me the device
e is closed by
b a manual source
s (i.e. H
HMI, SCADA A or Logic) orr by
a protecttion scheme such as Auttomatic Backkfeed restora vice will be inn Single Shot Mode until the
ation the dev
AR Rese et time expirres. When in Single Sho ot mode, if a fault occurrs, the devicee will do one
e trip to lockkout
using the Single Shhot Trip (SST) selected configuration. Please refer to secttion 6.2.6 Single S Shot Trip
T
(SST).
Note:
• A
Auto Reclosinng is active wh
hen Protectionn and Auto Re eclosing are ON,
O Live Line aand Hot Line Tag are OFF and
o
one of the pro
otection elemeents has “R” in
n the reclose map.
m

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 67
NOJA-5002-08

• Each of the OC, NPS, EF, SEF and Yn protection element groups have their own sequence counter which is
only incremented when an element in that group generates a protection trip.
• A global trip counter only allows a maximum of four protection trips regardless of the source of the trip (includes
any protection element trip e.g. Under Voltage trip).
Panel Navigation PROTECTION GLOBAL SETTINGS

[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS]


►Page 1◄ Page 2 Page 3
ª [Protection]
Active Group 1
ª [Page 1]
Protection Off
AR Auto Reclose Off
LL Live Line Off
EF Earth Fault Off
SEF Sensitive Earth Fault Off
CLP Cold Load Pickup Off
ABR Autobackfeed Restore Off
UV Undervoltage Off
UV4 Sag Off
HHLT Hot Line Tag Off

Panel Navigation GROUP 1 AUTO RECLOSING

[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] ► Auto Reclosing Map◄
Ø
Voltage Reclosing Control Disabled
[MAIN MENU]
1st Reclose Time (s) 10.00
ª [Groups Settings] 2nd Reclose Time (s) 20.00
3rd Reclose Time (s) 20.00
ª [Group 1…4]
Reset Time 30.00
ª Auto Reclosing: [AR] ⇒ ZSC Mode Disabled
LSRM Mode Disabled
LSRM Time (s) 15.00
Sequence Advance 0

OC Trips: 3, NPS Trips: 3


EF Trips: 3, SEF Trips: 0
Yn Trips: 0

Reclose Sequence Settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Voltage reclosing control element VRC Enable Enabled/Disabled – Disabled
1st Reclose Time (s) Tr1,s 0.1 – 180s 0.01s 10.00
2nd Reclose Time (s) Tr2,s 1.0 – 180s 0.01s 20.00
3rd Reclose Time (s) Tr3,s 1.0 – 180s 0.01s 20.00
Reset time1 Tres 5.0 – 180s 0.01s 30.00
LSRM Mode LSRM Mode Enabled/Disabled - Disabled
LSRM Time (s) Timer, sec 1 – 300s 1s 15.00
Zone sequence co-ordination ZSC Mode Enabled / Disabled – Disabled
mode
Sequence Advance Sequence Advance 0-3 NA 0

Note:
1. Also referred to as AR Reset Time.

68 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-008

6.2.1 Loss
s of Supply Recl osing Mode (LSR
RM)
Loss of Supply Reclosing Mode (LSRM) is u used in autom mation schemes to restririct a reclose
er going throu
ugh
the full A
AR sequence er a loss of supply.
e when a fault occurs afte

If LSRM is enabled, when a Loss of Supply (LSD) is reg gistered, the recloser waiits for the “tie
e-in recloserr” to
nd restore supply (LSD fla
close an ag cleared) b ng the LSRM timer.
before startin

Single sh
hot characteristic (refer to be activated for the durattion of the LS
o 6.2.6) will b SRM timer.

If no fau
ult pickup is registered while
w the LS
SRM timer is
s active then
n when the LLSRM time expires,
e norm
mal
configure
ed auto recloose sequencce will be ena
abled.

Note:
• L
LSRM is appliicable to OC, NPS, EF and SEF protectio
on elements.

6.2.2 Zone Sequence Co-o


ordinatio
on (ZSC)
Enabling g Zone Sequ uence Co-ord
dination makkes the devicce move its trrip counter foorward by on
ne if it detectts a
downstre eam protection device haas operated (loss of fault current is detected). TThe counter increments onlyo
after all protection elements
e havve reset. Thiss allows co-ordination with
w downstreeam devices with fast tim mes
for initiall operations and
a slow tim
mes for subseequent opera ations.
Note:
• ZSC is appliicable to OC, NPS
N and EF p
protection elem
ments.
• If ZSC and Sectionaliser
S mode
m are enab
bled, if there is
i a protection operation, ZS
SC will be bloc
cked.
• ZSC will nott update the tri
rip and maximu
um current rec
corded.

6.2.3 Sequence Advance


A
This feaature advancces the sequ uence countter, forward by one if it detects thaat an upstre eam device has h
operatedd (a loss of supply is detected).
d W
When the nu umber of LS SDs reachess the predeffined Sequen nce
Advance e value (1-3), no other se
equence advvances can occur.
o Seque ence Advancce applies too all overcurrrent
elementss. It operate
es on a “C” orr an “R” in th
he AR map and is not allo
owed to exceeed the furtheest “S” or “L”” on
the right hand side of
o the AR ma ap for all of th s of whether the
he master ellements that are enabledd (regardless
sequencce advance value
v has been reached) . The sequen nce advance e feature will never cause
e a trip to occcur.
Refer to section 6.8 for
f descriptioon of LSD.

Note:
1. S
Sequence Ad
dvance will nott update the tri
rip and maximu
um current rec
corded and dooes not operatte when in ala
arm
m
mode.

6.2.4 Auto
o Reclos
sing Map
p
GROUP 1 AU
UTO RECLOSI
ING MAP

►OC/NP
PS◄ EF/SEF
F Yn
ª [Au
uto Reclosing
g Map]
NPS] ⇒
ª [OC/N 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SST E - - - SST E - - -
OC1+ R R L L OC1- D D D D
OC2+ D D D D OC2- D D D D
OC3+ L L L L OC3- D D D D

SST E - - - SST E - - -
NPS1+ R R L L NPS1- D D D D
NPS2+ D D D D NPS2- D D D D
NPS3+ L L L L NPS3- D D D D

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 69
NOJA
A-5002-08

GROUP 1 AU
UTO RECLOSI
ING MAP

OC/NPS ►EF/SEF◄
◄ Yn
ª [A
Auto Reclosin
ng Map]
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
SEF] ⇒
ª [EF/S SST E - - - SST E - - -
EF1+ R R L L EF1- D D D D
EF2+ D D D D EF2- D D D D
EF3+ L L L L EF3- D D D D

SEF+ D D D D SEF- D D D D

GROUP 1 AU
UTO RECLOSI
ING MAP

OC/NPS EF/SEF ►Yn◄


ª [A
Auto Reclosin
ng Map]
1 2 3 4
ª [Yn] ⇒ Yn D D D D

Available
e operating modes for each
e of the e
elements (O
OC1+, OC1-, OC2+, OC22-, OC3+, OC3-,
O EF1+ and
a
EF1-, EFF2-, EF2+, EF3-,
E EF3+, NPS1+,
N NPSS1-, NPS2+, NPS2-, NPS
S3+, NPS3-, S
SEF+, SEF- and Yn) are
e;
ttrip and Reclose trip an
nd Lockout
A
Alarm only Disablle.
The maxximum numb ber of operaations to locckout is defined by applying masterr element se ettings e.g. if 3
operations are requirred, the apprropriate OC1
1, EF1, NPS1 1, SEF, Yn elements
e he 3rd trip.
havve an L for th
For OC,, EF and NPS, fuse sa aving or burrning regimees can be im pplication of an
mplemented through ap
appropriate operating
g mode to th
he stage 2 an
nd 3 protectio
on elements

6.2.5 Secttionalisin
ng
A Sectio
onaliser “Cou
unts” the num
mber of upst ream operattions under fault
f ns to isolate the
conditioons and open
downstreeam fault when
w a pre-c number of “C”s (counts) is reachedd in the AR
configured n R map and the
upstream
m device is open.
o

When Se ectionalise Mode


M is Enabbled, the “C”” (Count) and d “S” (Sectio
onalise) in thee recloser map
m will beco ome
available
e:
• ““C” (Count) - Sectionaliser Count: When the fault f current exceeds thhe pickup se ettings and the
protection tim
mer expires, the device wwill wait for detection
d of Loss of Sup ply (LSD) be efore increassing
tthe sequencce counter in the AR map p.
• ““S” (Sectionalise) – Sectionaliser Trrip: When the e fault current exceeds tthe pickup settings
s and the
protection tim will wait for detection of Loss
mer expires, the device w L of Suppply (LSD) before opening the
ddevice.

Note:
• IIf the last entr
try in the Auto
o Reclose Seq quence is “L” (Lockout) the
en the recloser
er will not waitt for LSD and will
oopen as soon as the protec ction timer exp
pires causing a Protection Trip.
T

The secttionalising ca
apability can be enabled for each of the Protection Group Setttings.

70 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Autorec
close Map
• W When Sectio onalise Mode e is Enabled,, the “C” (Count) and “S” (Sectionaliseer) in the rec closer map will
w
bbecome available. All otther auto recclose options will still be available.
a Sta
tandard AR mapping
m logic
aapplies but in
n addition, note the follow
wing:
o “R” ca an only prece ede “L” where eas “C” can precede
p “S” or “L”.
o “S” an nd “L” can be used in the same AR mapping group p for each off the forward and reverse e
elemeents. For example if the s equence C-S S-S-S is used for OC1+ tthen we can use C-L-L-L for
OC2+.
o “R” an nd “C” cannott be used in the same AR R mapping group for eacch of the forw ward and
reversse elements. For example e if the sequeence R-R-L-L is used forr OC1+ then we cannot use u
C-S-DD-D for OC2+ +.
o If “R” is used in the forward ele ement group p then it is po
ossible to usee “C” in the reverse
r elemment
group and vice verrsa. For exam mple if R-R-LL-L is used foor OC1+ thenn we can use e C-S-D-D foor
OC2- (if OC1- has a “C” or “S” in the config guration).
• W When Sectio onalise Mode e is Disabled , “C” in the recloser map will change to “R” and th he “S” in the
rrecloser mapp will changee to “L”. Thiss change app plies to all ov
vercurrent baased protection elements
((OC/NPS/EF F/SEF/Yn).

ne (LL)
Live Lin
When LLL is enabled the device will
w trip to lockkout immedia
ately on a fault based onn the LL prote
ection setting
gs.

Single S
Shot Mode (SST)
• Please refer to section 6.2.6 for beha
aviour when device is in SST
S mode.

Panel Na
avigation GROUP 1 SETTINGS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Sectio
onaliser Mo
ode led◄
►Disabl
Ø
Protection Sett ings
[MAIN M
MENU]
OC NPS EF SEF Yn LL
L
ª [Group Se
ettings] MNT FE VE ABR VRC HR
RM
ª [G
Group 1…4]
Auto Reclosing:
AR ARVE

Direct
tional Elemments:
OC NPS EF SEF

Other:
CLP IT TTA
A
Warning:
• When Section naliser Mode is Enabled a warning me essage is dissplayed askinng the user to o review the AR
m
mapping for correct
c configu
uration and the
e user has the
e option to con
nfirm or cancell the request.
• When Sectionnaliser is Disabbled a warning g message is displayed infoorming the usser that the “C”s and “S”s in the
A
AR map will change
c to “R” s and “L”s, resspectively. Th
he user has the option to coonfirm or cance
el the request.
When se
ectionaliser mode
m is enab
bled, its statu
us will be displayed in the
e System Staatus screen.

6.2.6 Sing
gle Shot Trip (SS
ST)
Any trip in a sequence (trip 1, 2, 3 or 4) can be selected for a Single Shot Trip (S
SST) and this
s will determ
mine
the time current charracteristics used when Siingle Shot is initiated.
The Sing
gle Shot Trip
p can be se
et independe
ently for OC+
+, OC-, EF+ EF-, NPS+ and NPS- elements
e in the
Auto Recclosing map.
When thhe device is in SST mod de, if a prote ation occurs, the device will do one shot to lockkout
ection opera
based on
n the SST seettings in the AR map.

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 71
NOJA-5002-08

The device will be in SST mode in the following situations1, 2:


• When AR is enabled, any time the device is closed from a manual source (i.e. HMI panel, SCADA or
logic) or a protection/automation scheme3 such as Automatic Backfeed Restoration (ABR) and the
AR reset timer has not expired.
• When AR is disabled, any time the device is closed from any source.
• if LSRM mode is enabled and the LSRM timer has not expired
• when HLT is turned ON4
• from a closed position when Protection or Auto Reclosing is turned ON and the AR reset timer has
not expired.
Notes:
1. Protection must be enabled for Single Shot trip to be initiated. SST does not apply to SEF and Yn elements.
2. Device may behave differently when Sectionalise is enabled. Refer to section below.
3. Protection/automation schemes include ABR, Auto Change Over (ACO) and UV3 AutoClose.
4. When HLT is ON, the SST protection settings apply with the exception of when HLT is linked to LL. In that
instance the LL protections settings apply.

SST and Sectionaliser mode


If sectionalising is enabled and the device is in Single Shot mode it will do one shot to lockout immediately
on a fault for safety reasons (i.e. it will not wait for LSD) when certain conditions apply. See the tables
below.

Auto Reclosing - SST Conditions

Settings Condition AR Reset SST AR Map Device waits for


Timer Mode LSD
AR Device is closed from a manual Not Yes “L”, “R”, “S” or “C” No
Enabled source. Expired
Device is closed from a Not Yes “L” or “R” No
protection/automation scheme Expired
such as ABR.

Device is closed from a Not Yes “S” or “C” Yes


protection/automation scheme Expired
such as ABR.

AR Device is closed from any source Not Yes “L”, “R”, “S” or “C” No
Disabled Expired
Device is closed from any source Expired Yes “L” or “R” No
Device is closed from any source Expired Yes “S” or “C” Yes

HLT and LSRM - SST conditions

Settings Condition AR Reset SST AR Map Device waits for


Timer Mode LSD
HLT Device is closed from any source NA Yes “L”, “R”, “S” or “C” No
Enabled
LSRM Device is closed and LSRM time NA Yes “L” or “R” No
Enabled has not expired

Device is closed and LSRM time NA Yes “S” or “C” Yes


has not expired

72 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-008

6.2.7 AR OC/NPS/
O /EF/SEF//Yn Settings
The Auto o Reclose map
m for OC, NPS, EF, S EF and Yn determines
d how
h each eleement opera
ates. Any of the
trips can d as a single shot trip. Byy default the first trip is se
n be selected elected for S
SST.

The operating modess are defined


d as follows:
R = trip a
and Reclose
e A = Alarm
m only L = trip and Lockout C = Coount S = Sectionalise
e
D = Disaable + = SST Set to this T
Trip

AR OC/N
NPS/EF/SEF
F/Yn Element Operating M
Mode Setting
gs
Factory d
defaults are in
n the column on
o the right ha
and side of eac
ch field.
st nd rd th
Elem
ment 1 trip 2 trip 3 trip 4 trip
SST OC
C+ +
OC1+ R/L/A//D/C/S R R/L/A/D/C
C/S R R/L/A/D/C
C/S L L/A/D/S L
OC2+ R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
OC3+ R/L/A//D/C/S L R/L/A/D/C
C/S L R/L/A/D/C
C/S L L/D/S L
SST NP
PS+ +
NPS1+
+ R/L/A//D/C/S R R/L/A/D/C
C/S R R/L/A/D/C
C/S L L/A/D/S L
NPS2+
+ R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
NPS3+
+ R/L/A//D/C/S L R/L/A/D/C
C/S L R/L/A/D/C
C/S L L/D/S L
SST EF
F+
EF1+ R/L/A//D/C/S R R/L/A/D/C
C/S R R/L/A/D/C
C/S L L/A/D/S L
EF2+ R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/D/S D
EF3+ R/L/A//D/C/S L R/L/A/D/C
C/S L R/L/A/D/C
C/S L L/A/D/S L
SEF+ R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
SST OC
C- +
OC1- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
OC2- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
OC3- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/D/S D
SST NP
PS- +
NPS1- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
NPS2- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
NPS3- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/D/S D
SST EF
F- +
EF1- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
EF2- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
EF3- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/D/S D
SEF- R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
Yn R/L/A//D/C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D R/L/A/D/C
C/S D L/A/D/S D
Notes:
1 AAll elements can be config gured to “C” aand “S” when sectionalising g is enabled. AR map logic c applies. Pleease
refer to sectio
on 6.2.5.
2 AAlarms (A) aree activated whhen a protectio
on element deetects that a protection
p operration is requiired and will re
eset
when the pro otection element resets. T This is indepe
endent of wha at is in the ARR map unles ss the elemen nt is
Disabled (“D””). Refer to sec
ction 6.2.14 A
Alarm Latching
g for more detaails.
3 SSST does nott apply to SEF F and Yn eleme ents.

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 73
NOJA
A-5002-08

6.2.8 Disa
able Fastt Trips (D
DFT)
This settting disabless the low set elements ((OC2+/OC2-, NPS2+/NP
PS2- and EF
F2+/EF2-). It will disable the
elementss but will nott change the AR Map.

Panel Na
avigation PR
ROTECTION G
GLOBAL SETT
TINGS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] Page 1 ►Page 2◄ Page 3
ª [Protectio
on]
ative Seque
NPS Nega ence Off
ª [P
Page 2]
OV Overr Voltage Off
UF Undeer Frequenc
cy Off
OF Overr Frequency
y Off
HRM Harm
monics Off
HLT Link
k HLT to LL
L Off
MNT Maximum Number
r of Trips Off
SSM Shor
rt Sequence
e Mode Off
DFT Disa
able Fast T
Trips Off
Max No. of Trips t
to Lockout Normal
Alarm mo
ode Off

DFT setttings

Title Designation
D Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Disablle Fast Trips DF
FT On/Off NA Offf

6.2.9 Max
ximum Nu
umber o
of Trips (M
MNT)
Maximum m Number of Trips (MNT) limits tthe number of protectio on trips alloowed for loww set eleme ents
(OC2+/OOC2-, NPS2+/NPS2- and EF2+/EF2 2-) in a sliding window of time. Thhe user sets s the maxim mum
number of trips to occcur over a sets amount o e number of trips is exceeeded during this period, the
of time. If the
disable ffast trips (DF Refer to section 6.2.8 .
FT) setting is activated. R
The counter is reset by:
• tturning off th
he MNT contrrol
• a manual trip
p or close (in
ncluding a I/O
O, SCADA orr PC source))
• cchanging the
e group settin
ngs.
The Secctionaliser trip
p is counted in the MNT functionality
y only when “C”
“ and/or “S S” are in the AR Map in one
o
n (e.g. forwarrd elements) and “R” and
direction d/or “L” are in
n the AR ma
ap in the oppposite directio
on (e.g. reve
erse
elementss).

Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] GROUP 1 MAXIM UM NUMBER OF TRIPS
Ø
Maximum Number o
of Trips ble
Disab
[MAIN M
MENU] Number of Protec
ction Trips
s 6
ª [Groups Settings]
S Prot Trip Window
w (Hrs) 3

ª [G
Group 1…4]
ª Protection Settinggs: [MNT] ⇒

74 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Max No of Trips settiings

Title Design
nation Rang
ge Resollution Fa
actory Defaultt
Maximum
m Number of Trips
T Exce
ess Fast Trip M
Mode Off/On NA Off
Number o
of Protection Trips
T Trip Count 1 - 50 1 6
Protectio
on Trip Window
w Trip Window
W 1 – 24H
Hrs 1 3

6.2.10
0 Max
x No of Trips to L
Lockout (79
( Lockout)
Max No of Trips to Lockout limits
s OC, NPS, E
EF, SEF and VE protectio
on to a user sspecified number of tripss.
There arre three optio
ons:
• Normal: 4 sh
hot to lockoutt protection ssequences
• 7
79-3: overrid
des 4 shot to lockout prottection seque out occurs att the 3rd trip
ences. Locko
• 7
79-2: overrid
des 4 shot to lockout prottection seque out occurs att the 2nd trip.
ences. Locko
If there iss an “S” in th
he AR map th
he device wi ll do a Sectio
onaliser trip to
t lockout.

Panel Na
avigation PROTECTION
P GLOBAL SET
TTINGS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] Page 1 ►Page 2◄ Page 3
ª [Protectio
on]
NPS Neg
gative Sequuence Off
ª [P
Page 2]
OV Oveer Voltage Off
UF Undder Frequenncy Off
OF Oveer Frequenccy Off
HRM Har
rmonics Off
HLT Lin
nk HLT to LLL Off
MNT Max
ximum Numbeer of Trips Off
SSM Sho
ort Sequencce Mode Off
DFT Dis
sable Fast Trips Off
Max No.
. of Trips to Lockoutt Normal
l
Alarm mode
m Off
f

Max No of Trips to Lockout settin


ngs

Title Des
signation Range Resoluttion Fac
ctory Defaultt
MNT Maximu
um Number off Off/On
n NA Off
MNT Maxximum Numbe
er of Trips
Trips
Max No o
of Trips to Locckout Max No of Trrips to Lockout Norma
al/ NA Norma
al
3/2

6.2.11 Short Seque


ence Mod
de (SSM))
Short Se
equence Mo ode limits OCC, NPS, EF , SEF and VE V protectio
on to the firsst and last trips of an Auto
A
Reclose trip sequen nce. The lasst reclose timme in the seequence is used
u as thee reclose timme for the shhort
sequencce setting. Fo
or example, a 4 trip to locckout sequence such as O-5s-CO-5ss-CO-10s-CO O-lockout woould
become O-10s-CO-lo ockout.

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 75
NOJA
A-5002-08

Panel Na
avigation PR
ROTECTION G
GLOBAL SETT
TINGS
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS]
Page 1 ►Page 2◄ Page 3
ª [Protectio
on]
Page 2] ⇒
ª [P NPS Nega
ative Seque
ence Off
OV Overr Voltage Off
UF Undeer Frequenc
cy Off
OF Overr Frequency
y Off
HRM Harm
monics Off
HLT Link
k HLT to LL
L Off
MNT Maxi
imum Number
r of Trips Off
SSM Shor
rt Sequence
e Mode Off
DFT Disa
able Fast T
Trips Off
Max No. of Trips t
to Lockout Normal
Alarm mo
ode Off

SSM setttings

Title De
esignation Range
R Resolu
ution Fa
actory Defaultt
Short S
Sequence Mod
de SSM
M On/Off NA Off

6.2.12
2 Alarrm Mode
When A Alarm mode isi ON and Protection
P is OFF all pro otection elem
ments remainn enabled, however
h the trip
map beh haves such that
t all “L, S, R and C” se
ettings in the
e reclose ma m operations will
ap operate ass “A”. Alarm
be logge
ed and reportted via protocols.

Alarm Mode Summa


ary

Prottection Alarm Mod


de Behaviour
ON ON or OFF Protecction acts as normal
n regardless of Alarm mode settings s
OFF ON All pro
otection eleme ents remain enabled, howevver the trip map changed such
s
that a
all “L, S, R, C and
a A” settings s in the reclosse map operatte as “A”.
OFF OFF Theree will be no picckups or alarm
ms.

Panel Na
avigation PR
ROTECTION G
GLOBAL SETT
TINGS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] Page 1 ►Page 2◄ Page 3
ª [Protectio
on]
NPS Nega
ative Sequeence Off
Page 2] ⇒
ª [P OV Over Voltage Off
UF Undeer Frequenccy Off
OF Over Frequency y Off
HRM Harm
monics Off
HLT Link
k HLT to LLL Off
MNT Maxi
imum Numbe r of Trips Off
SSM Short Sequencee Mode Off
DFT Disa
able Fast TTrips Off
Max No. of Trips t
to Lockout Normal
Alarm mo
ode Off

Alarm Mode settingss

Title Des
signation Ra
ange Resolu
ution Fa
actory Defaultt
Alarm Mode Alarm
m On/Off NA Off

76 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

6.2.13
3 Ope
erating Mode
M
The Ope
erating mode
e of the switc
chgear is defiined as follow
ws:

Protection Alarm Mode1 Section


naliser Operating Mode e
ON ON or OFF OFF Reccloser
OFF OFF NA Sw
witch
OFF ON NA Ala
arm Switch
ON ON or OFF ON Secctionaliser

Note:
1. P
Please referr to section 6..2.12 Alarm M
Mode.

The System Status menu


m ys the config uration (Con
display nfig) of the sw
witchgear whhich includes
s the switchg
gear
d operating mode
type and m as show
wn below.

Panel Na
avigation SYSTEM STA
ATUS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒
ST ►G
GENERAL◄ WARNING
W MA
ALFUNCTION

Da
ate/Time : 21/01/2
2011, 10:00
0:18
Co
onfig e, Recloser
: 3 Phase
St
tatus : Lockout
t

Me
easurements
s P
Power Quali
ity
In
nput/Output
t P
Power Suppl
ly
Pr
rotection P
Protocols
Au
utomation C
Communicati
ions Port
L
Logic

6.2.14
4 Alarrm Latch
hing
Alarms a
are activated
d when a prottection eleme
ent detects that
t a protecttion operatioon is required
d.

When th
he alarm is no
ot latched, th n the protecttion element resets.
he alarm will automaticallly reset when

When thhe alarm is la


atched, it will remain activve when the protection elements
e reseets. The ala
arm can then n be
manuallyy reset via the
t Reset an nd Alerts me enus on the panel (referr to sectionss 7.8 and 7.9.1) or throu ugh
SCADA or Logic usiing “Reset Binary
B Fault T Targets”. Th
he alarm will also reset when the sw witch transitio
ons
from ope
en to close iff “Reset Flags on Close” is enabled (rrefer to sectio
on 7.8).

Note:
• While a protecction element is active the a
alarm for that element
e canno
ot be reset.

Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ⇒ Faul
lt Flags

Ø
Reset Fault Flag
gs on close
e Enable
ed
[MAIN M
MENU] Displa
ay Alerts Disable
ed
Alarm Not Latche
ed
ª [System Settings]
S
Fault Flags] ⇒
ª [F

Alarm La
atching Settin
ngs
Factory
Title Designatiion Range Resolution
Default
Alarm La
atching Alarm
m Latching Latched/Not Latched
L N/A Not Latched
d

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 77
NOJA-5002-08

6.3 Reset Logical Block Close


Logical Block Close is a command that can be issued from an I/O module, a logic expression or through a
SCADA point to block close operations from any source.
“Reset Logical Block Close” is used to reset the Logical Block Close and can be issued from the HMI panel
as shown below.

Panel Navigation
RESET MENU
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
Ø Energy Meters
[MAIN MENU] Fault Counters
SCADA Counters
ª [Reset Menu] DNP3-SA Counters
ª [Reset Logical Block Close] ⇒ GOOSE Counters
Reset Hot Line Tag
Oscillography records
Interruption Counters and Duration
Sag/Swell Counters and Duration
Reset Logical Block Close
Reset GPS Hardware
Reset Wi-Fi Hardware
Reset Mobile Network Modem

6.4 Voltage Protection (VE)


Voltage protection allows protection to operate in response to dips or rises in three phase voltage, phase
imbalance, loss of phase or loss of three phase supply. There are four Under Voltage elements (UV1, UV2,
UV3 and UV4 Sag), four Over Voltage elements (OV1, OV2, OV3 and OV4) and an Auto Reclosing element
(AR VE).
The Auto Reclosing element allows up to three reclose operations if the device has operated in response to
any voltage element. Each element can be enabled or disabled but the reclose time is the same for all
voltage elements. Additional auto reclose settings can be configured for the Loss of Supply Under Voltage
element (UV3). Refer to section 6.4.3.
For the UV4 Sag element additional settings apply. Please see below and refer to section 6.4.4.

Note:
• The fault reset time for the VE protection elements is 50ms and is not configurable.

78 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation GROUP 1 VOLTAGE ELEMENT

[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] ►Under Voltage◄ Over Voltage Sag
Ø
UV1 (Phase):
[MAIN MENU] Voltage Multiplier 0.85
ª [Groups Settings] Tripping Time (s) 10.00

ª [Group 1…4] UV2 (Line to Line):


ª Protection Settings [VE] Voltage Multiplier 0.80
Tripping Time (s) 10.00
ªUnder Voltage ⇒
UV3 (Loss of Supply):
Tripping Time (s) 60.00

GROUP 1 VOLTAGE ELEMENT

ª Over Voltage
Under Voltage ►Over Voltage◄ Sag
ª [Page 1] ⇒
►Page 1◄ Page 2

OV1 (Phase):
OV1 Voltage Multiplier 1.15
OV1 Tripping Time (s) 10.00

OV2 (Line to Line):


OV2 Voltage Multiplier 1.15
OV2 Tripping Time (s) 10.00

GROUP 1 VOLTAGE ELEMENT

Under Voltage ►Over Voltage◄ Sag


ª Over Voltage
ª [Page 2] ⇒ Page 1 ►Page 2◄

OV3 (Neutral Displacement):


OV3 Voltage Multiplier 0.05
OV3 Tripping Time (s) 10.00
Moving Average Mode Disabled
Moving Average Window (s) 5.0

OV4 (Negative Sequence):


OV4 Voltage Multiplier 0.05
Ov4 Tripping Time (s) 10.00

GROUP 1 VOLTAGE ELEMENT

ªSAG ⇒ Under Voltage Over Voltage ►Sag◄

UV4 Sag:
Min Multiplier 0.10
Max Multiplier 0.90
Mid Multiplier 0.5
Operation Time (s) 10
Lockout time (Min) 10
Voltage Type Ph/Gnd
Voltages ABC_RST

OSM User Manual Protection 79


NOJA
A-5002-08

6.4.1 Phase Under Voltage


e (UV1)
Phase U Under Voltagee is mainly used
u for load shedding. Itt responds to
o three phasee positive se
equence volta
age
falling be
elow a user set
s level.
UV1 setttings
Title
e Des
signation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Voltag
ge Multiplier UV1 UM
M 0.6 – 1 0.01 0.8
85
Trippin
ng Time (s) UV1 Td
dt Min, s 0 – 180s 0.01s 10
0.00
Notes:
1. For UV1 pickkup voltage eq quals UM x U U_rated / √3; where
w U_rated d is the rated system voltag
ge entered in the
measuremen nt settings (refe
er to section 5
5.2).
2. UV1 will not operate
o underr LSD conditio on – use UV3 for
f this situatio
on.

6.4.2 Line
e to Line Under V
Voltage (U
UV2)
Line to L
Line Under Voltage
V is used to prote
ect downstream loads se
ensitive to vooltage imbalance or dipss in
voltage. It responds to
t a voltage drop across any two pha
ases.
UV2 Setttings

Title Designa
ation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Voltag
ge multiplier UV
V2 UM 0.6 – 1 0.01 0.8
80
Trippin
ng time (s) UV
V2 Tdt Min, s 0 – 180s 0.01s 10
0.00
Notes:
1. For UV2 elem ment pickup voltage Up equ uals UM x U_rrated; where U_rated is thee rated system
m voltage ente
ered
in the measurrement setting
gs (refer to secction 5.2).
2. UV2 will not operate
o underr LSD conditioon – use UV3 for
f this situatio
on.

6.4.3 Loss
s of Supply Unde
er Voltag
ge (UV3)
Loss of S
Supply Unde er Voltage allows the reccloser to ope
en in respons se to a loss of three pha ase supply. This
T
element monitors the e output of the
t Loss of S Supply Dete ector (LSD) and
a respondss to a loss of o current onn all
three phases plus a loss of voltagge on either the ABC or RST
R side terrminals (or alll six HV term
minals). Refe
er to
section 6
6.8 for a description of LS
SD.
UV3 setttings
Title Designa
ation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Trippin
ng time (s) UV
V3 Tdt Min, s 0 – 180s 0.01s 60
0.00

6.4.4 Volttage Sag Protectiion (UV4


4 Sag)
The Volttage Sag Prrotection elemment (UV4 S Sag) protectss against a voltage
v sag condition wh hen the volta
age
drops wiithin a user defined
d windo
ow for greate
er than a pre
e-configured time (operatiion time) as shown below
w:

UV
V4 Sag min < Voltage < U
UV 4 Sag ma
ax for ≥ Operation Time ((seconds)

When th e device is closed a prote


he UV4 Sag condition occurs and the ection operaation is initiated e.g. a trip
p or
alarm.

g Blocking
UV4 Sag
When th
he UV4 Sag condition
c occcurs and the pen, a close operation froom any source (e.g. AR VE,
e device is op V
nel, SCADA, I/O or logic) is blocked a
HMI pan and the devicce goes to loc
ckout.

If AR is turned ON or
o OFF, UV4 4 Sag Blocki ng is reset. If the UV4 Sag fault is present the operation timmer
restarts. If the UV4
4 Sag fault is nt when the operation tim
s still presen me expires tthen UV4 Sa ag blocking will
prevent a close operration from any source an nd if a close command is issued the ddevice goes to lockout.

80 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

UV4 Sagg Lockout Time


T
The devvice will automatically go to lockout w
when the UV
V4 Sag condition is true for longer th
han the Lockkout
ee table below).
Time (se

UV4 Setttings

Title Desig
gnation Range Reesolution Factory
F Defau
ult
1
Min Mu
ultiplier UM (Min)) 0.01
0 – 0.8 0.001 0.10
Max Mu
ultiplier UM (Maxx) 0.5
0 – 1.0 0.001 0.90
2
Mid Mu
ultiplier UM (Mid)) 0.5
0 – 1.0 0.001 0.5
Operatiion Time (s) Tdt Min, s 1 – 180 0.001s 10
Lockout Time3 (min) Lockout ttime, min 0 – 1440 1m
min 10
4
Voltage
e Type Voltage T
Type Ph/Gnd,
P Ph/Ph
h N/A
A Ph/Gnd
P
es5
Voltage Voltages ABC_RST,
A AB
BC, RST N/A
A ABC_RST
A
Notes:
1. UV4 Sag Min n equals Min Multiplier x U_
U_rated, UV4 Sag S Max equa als Max Multipplier x U_rateed, UV4 Sag Mid
threshold equuals Mid Multipplier x U_rate
ed where U_ra ated is the sysstem voltage. ((Note: When Phase to Gro ound
voltage is mo
onitored then the multipliers refer to U_ratted / √3)
2. The UV4 Sag g Mid threshold is used to geenerate a midd-point alarm (SCADA
( only) and does nott prevent a clo
ose.
3. If Lockout Tim
me is set to 0, UV4 Sag willll prevent a cloose indefinitely
y and not go tto lockout (a UV4
U Sag blockking
event generaated).
4. The user cann select to mon nitor phase to
o ground voltages Ua, Ub, Uc, U Ur, Us, Utt (generally forr single phase
e) or
phase to phase voltages Uab,
U Ubc, Uca,, Urs, Ust, Utrr
5. When the AC CR is open: AB BC_RST moniitors all 6 bush hings, ABC or RST monitorss one set of bu ushings.
When the AC CR is closed: only
o ABC bush hings are monnitored.

UV4 Sag
g protection is
i deactivateed when:
• UV4 Sag picckup has rese et and the 50
0ms reset tim
mer has expired
• UV4 Sag glo obal control iss turned OFFF
• UV4 Sag ele ement is disa abled
• UV global co ontrol is turne
ed OFF
• GGlobal protection is turneed OFF.

6.4.5 Phase Over Voltage (OV1)


Phase O
Over Voltage responds to three phase
e positive seq
quence volta
age rising aboove a user set level.
OV1 setttings
Title
e Des
signation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Voltag
ge multiplier OV1 UM
M 1.0 – 1.2 0.01 1.1
15
Trippin
ng time (s) OV1 Td
dt Min, s 0 – 180s 0.01s 10
0.00
Note: Fo
or OV1 pickup
p voltage equ uals UM x U_rrated / √3; where
wh U_rated is the rated system voltag
ge entered in the
me
easurement settings
s (refer to
t section 5.2)).

6.4.6 Line
e to Line Over Vo
oltage (O
OV2)
Line to L
Line Over Vo
oltage respon
nds to a volta
age rise acro
oss any two phases.
p
OV2 Setttings

Title
e Des
signation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
OV2 V
Voltage multiplier OV2 UM
M 1.0 – 1.2 0.01 1.1
15
OV2 T
Tripping time (s) OV2 Td
dt Min, s 0 – 180s 0.01s 10
0.00
Note:
• FFor OV2 elem
ment pickup vooltage equals UM x U_rate
ed; where U_rrated is the raated system voltage
v entered in
tthe measurem
ment settings (refer
( to sectio
on 5.2).

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 81
NOJA
A-5002-08

6.4.7 Neutral Disp


placemen
nt Overvoltage (O
OV3)
Neutral Displacemennt Overvolta
age protectio
on (59N) is used in distribution nettworks with high ground ding
impedannce. 59N is designed
d to be
b used for eearth-fault protection in isolated neuttral, resistan
nce grounded
d or
reactancce grounded systems.
p due to the OV3 elemen
A pickup nt can be blo
ocked if the correspondin
c et via Logic, I/O
ng “Block” daatapoint is se
or SGA e.g. if Blockk P(OV3) is set via SG
GA then pick kups and prootection ope rations due to OV3 will be
blocked.
Pickups due to OV3 can also be blocked whe
en Moving Av e is enabled (see below).
verage Mode

Moving Average Mo
ode
When “M Moving Averaage Mode” iss enabled, O
OV3 values accumulate
a a each quarrter cycle and are averag
at ged
every 1000ms. The calculated
c va
alues of OV33 during the “Moving Ave
erage Windoow” are usedd instead of the
instantan
neous valuess of OV3.
When M
Moving Average Mode is enabled,
e if on
n a close, OVV3 pickup is present on aany side of the recloser (i.e.
(
ABC and
d/or RST sid
de), the protection opera ation due to OV3 is inhibbited and Bloock P(OV3) is set, until the
measure
ed OV3 value
es become leess than the threshold.

OV3 Setttings

Title Designa
ation Range
e Ressolution Factory Default
OV3 Vo
oltage multiplier OV
V3 UM 0.01-1 0.01 0..05
OV3 Trripping time (ss) OV
V3 Tdt Min, s 0 – 180s 0.01 s 10
0.00
Moving
g Average Mod
de Mo
oving Average Mode Disabled/Enabled NA Disabled
Moving
g Average Win
ndow (s) Mo
oving Average Window, s 0.1 to 10 0.1 5..0
Note:
• The neutral (o
or residual) voltage is equal to three times
s the zero seq
quence voltagee.
• FFor OV3 elemment pickup vooltage equals UM x U_rated d / √3; where U_rated is thee rated system
m voltage ente
ered
iin the measurrement setting
gs (refer to secction 5.2).
• OV3 does nott operate if all of the 3 phase
e to ground vo
oltages fall below 0.5kV.
• IIf the pickup voltages
v are be
elow 0.1kV th ey are reporte
ed as 0.1kV.
• Update rate fo
or moving ave
erage window iis 100ms.

6.4.8 Negative Sequence O


Overvolttage (OV
V4)
Negative
e Sequence Overvoltage e (47N) prote ects the system against voltage imbbalance and operates wh
hen
the nega
ative sequence voltage exceeds the tthreshold sett by the user.
OV4 Setttings
Title
e Des
signation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
OV4 V
Voltage multiplier OV4 UM
M 0.01-1 0.01 0.0
05
OV4 T
Tripping time (s) OV4 Td
dt Min, s 0 – 180s 0.01s 10
0.00
Note:
• FFor OV4 elemment pickup vooltage equals UM x U_rated d / √3; where U_rated is thee rated system
m voltage ente
ered
iin the measurrement settings (refer to secction 5.2).
• OV4 does nott operate if all of the 3 phase
e to ground vo
oltages fall below 0.5kV.
• A pickup will not
n be activate
ed when the s witch is open unless the rec
close map is sset to alarm.
• When in the open
o state OV
V4 is only appliicable to the ABC
A bushings..
• OV4 does nott operate if the
e pickup voltag
ge < 0.5kV.
• IIf the pickup voltages
v are be
elow 0.1kV th ey are reporte
ed as 0.1kV.

82 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

6.5 Auto Reclosing Voltage Element (AR VE)


Voltage Element Reclosing is activated by a protection operation initiated by any of the voltage elements.
The number of trips to lockout and a single reclose time for all voltage elements can be user set. The reclose
sequence reset time is set by AR OC/NPS/EF/SEF.
If none of the voltage elements are mapped for Trip to Reclose then AR VE is disabled.
UV4 Sag can block a close operation. Please refer to Section 6.4.4.

GROUP 1 AR VE
Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] VE Reclose Time (s) ►10.00◄
No of Trips to lockout 4
Ø
[MAIN MENU] Auto Reclose Time Map:
ª [Groups Settings] UV1 (Phase) Disabled
UV2 (Line to Line) Disabled
ª [Group 1…4] UV3 (Loss of Supply) Disabled
ª Auto Reclosing: [ARVE] ⇒ Operation in SST only Disabled
AutoClose Mode Disabled
AutoClose Time (s) 120
UV4 Sag Disabled
OV1 (Phase) Disabled
OV2 (Line to Line) Disabled
Ov3 (Neutral Displacement) Disabled
OV4 (Negative Sequence) Disabled

Reclose sequence settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Reclose time Tr 1 – 180s 0.01s 10
No of Trips to Lockout No of Trips to Lockout 1-4 1 4
1
Operation in SST only Operation in SST only Enabled/Disabled NA Disabled
AutoClose Mode2 AutoClose Mode Enabled/Disabled Disabled
AutoClose Time2 AutoClose Time, sec 1-180s 1s 120
Notes:
1. Applies to UV3 element only. When “Operation in SST only” is enabled, UV3 will ONLY operate when a UV3
protection operation is requested AND the device is in single shot mode. In this instance it will do one shot to
lockout.
2. Applies to UV3 element only.
When UV3 AutoClose Mode is enabled and the device is opened by the UV3 element, the recloser will stay
open until voltage is detected above the LSD threshold on both sides of the recloser for the duration of the
configured AutoClose time.
“Open UV3 AutoClose” will be displayed on the panel and in CMS to indicate that AutoClose can take place.
If AutoClose is pending the following actions will cancel AutoClose:
• Protection, AR or UV turned OFF
• UV3 set to Disabled
• Protection settings changed
• Protection Group changed
• Hot Line Tag is turned ON

OSM User Manual Protection 83


NOJA-5002-08

• UV4 Sag Blocking


• Recloser closed from any source
• “Operation in SST only” is enabled.
Note: When the recloser closes due to UV3 AutoClose the sequence counter is reset.
Reclosing map
Element Settings Factory Default
UV1 Reclose/Disabled/Alarm/Lockout Disabled
UV2 Reclose/Disabled/Alarm/Lockout Disabled
UV3 Reclose/Disabled/Alarm/Lockout Disabled
UV4 Sag Reclose/Disabled/Alarm/Lockout Disabled
OV1 Reclose/Disabled/Alarm/Lockout Disabled
OV2 Reclose/Disabled/Alarm/Lockout Disabled
OV3 Reclose/Disabled/Alarm/Lockout Disabled
OV4 Reclose/Disabled/Alarm/Lockout Disabled
Notes:
• When an element is set to alarm, the alarm will be activated only when the recloser is closed. It applies to all
voltage elements with the exception of OV4 where the alarm is activated whether the recloser is open or closed.
• When an element is set to reclose, the pickup will be activated only when the recloser is closed. It applies to all
voltage elements.
• Please refer to section 6.2.10 for Max No of Trips to Lockout (79 Lockout) and section 6.2.11 for Short
Sequence Mode.
• If OV3 is set to Reclose, Alarm or Lockout prior to upgrading to firmware 1.15 and above please note that it will
not operate after the upgrade until the OV3 global control is enabled. Please refer to 6.14 Protection Status
Control (PSC).

6.6 Hot Line Tag


Hot Line Tag (HLT) blocks a close operation from any source. If the recloser is closed and a protection
operation is initiated, the device will trip to lockout based on SST settings.
The panel Hot Line Tag LED is lit when HLT is active.
HLT can only be disabled from the source it was enabled from. Protection settings cannot be changed while
Hot Line Tag is active.
HLT is activated on the Protection Status screen in the same way as other protection elements.
The Live Line Fast Key can be linked to enable Hot Line Tag. When LL is linked to HLT, if a protection
operation is initiated, the device will trip to Lockout based on the Live Line protection settings (not SST).
Refer to section 6.1.9 for more details. See panel HLT Settings below.
Panel Navigation PROTECTION GLOBAL SETTINGS

[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ►Page 1◄ Page 2 Page 3


ª [Protection]
Active Group 1
ª [Page 1] ⇒ Protection Off
AR Auto Reclose Off
LL Live Line Off
EF Earth Fault Off
SEF Sensitive Earth Fault Off
CLP Cold Load Pickup Off
ABR Autobackfeed Restore Off
UV Undervoltage Off
HLT Hot Line Tag Off

84 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation PROTECTION GLOBAL SETTINGS


[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS]
Page 1 ►Page 2◄ Page 3
ª [Protection]
ª [Page 2] NPS Negative Phase Sequence Off
NOV Over Voltage Off
UF Under Frequency Off
OF Over Frequency Off
HRM Harmonics Off
HLT Link HLT to LL1 Off
MNT Maximum Number of Trips Off
SSM Short Sequence Mode Off
DFT Disable Fast Trips Off
Max No. of Trips to Lockout Normal
Alarm mode Off

HLT settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Hot Line Tag HLT On/Off NA Off
Link HLT to LL (1) Link HLT to LL On/Off NA Off
Note:
1. The link (Link HLT to LL) when enabled turns on HLT when the Panel LL Fast Key is pushed. HLT and LL must
be OFF before the link can be made.
HLT can be reset from the Panel by a local user. This may be necessary if Hot Line Tag is applied by
SCADA and then communication is lost. A password is required by the local user to reset HLT.

Panel Navigation
RESET MENU
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
Energy Meters
Ø
Fault Counters
[MAIN MENU] SCADA Counters
ª [Reset Menu] DNP3-SA Counters
GOOSE Counters
ª [Reset Hot Line Tag] ⇒ Reset Hot Line Tag
Oscillography records
Interruption Counters and Duration
Sag/Swell Counters and Duration
Reset Logical Block Close
Reset Binary Fault Targets
Reset GPS Hardware
Reset Wi-Fi Hardware
Reset Mobile Network Modem

6.7 Frequency Protection (FE)


Frequency Protection monitors measurement of HV supply frequency and responds to changes in system
frequency. The Frequency elements can be set to Alarm, Disable or trip to Lockout.
Auto Reclose is not available for Frequency protection.

OSM User Manual Protection 85


NOJA
A-5002-08

Panel Na
avigation GR
ROUP 1 FREQ
QUENCY ELEMENT

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Under Frequency:
Ø Mode Disable
ed
Pickup Frequency (Hz) 49.50
[MAIN M
MENU]
Tripping
g Time (s) 10.0
00
ª [Groups Settings]
S
Over Frequency:
ª [G
Group 1…4]
Mode Disable
ed
ª Protection Settinggs: [FE] ⇒ Pickup Frequency (Hz) 50.50
Tripping
g Time (s) 10.0
00

6.7.1 Und
der Frequ
uency (UF)
Under Frequency ressponds to dip
ps in system
m frequency.
UF settin
ngs
Title Designation Range Reesolution Factory
F Defau
ult
Mode UF Mo
ode L
Lockout / Alarm
m / Disable – Disable
D
Pickup F
Frequency (Hzz) Fp 4
46 – 50 Hz (ffor rated freq. 50Hz), 0.001 Hz 49.50
4
5
55 – 60 Hz (ffor rated freq. 60Hz)
Tripping
g Time (s) Tt 0
0.05 – 120 s 0.001s 10.00

6.7.2 Over Freque


ency (OF
F)
Over Fre
equency resp
ponds to a ris
se in system
m frequency.
OF settin
ngs

Title Designation Range Reesolution Factory


F Defau
ult
Mode OF Mo
ode L
Lockout / Alarm
m / Disable – Disable
D
Pickup ffrequency (Hzz) Fp 5
50 – 55 Hz (ffor rated freq. 50Hz), 0.001 Hz 50.50
5
6
60 – 65 Hz (ffor rated freq. 60Hz)
Tripping
g time (s) Tt 0
0.05 – 120 s 0.001s 10.00

6.8 Loss of Su
upply D
Detectorr (LSD)
The Losss of Supply Detector de
etects loss o
of voltage (m
measured pha
ase to grounnd) and current on all th
hree
phases.
Uabc< activvates when voltage
v < LSD
D_level on each
e of the A,B
A and C terrminals
Urst< activvates when voltage
v < LSD
D_level on each
e of the R,S minals
R and T term
Iabc< activvates when current
c < 3A on all three phases
p
The firstt two elements (Uabc< and Urst<) are used by
y Voltage Reclosing Coontrol (VRC) and Automatic
Backfeed d Restoration (ABR) elem
ments as inp
puts.
The LSD D element indicates to otther protectio
on elementss that supply has been loost. To provide validation
n of
loss of ssupply both voltage andd current are e monitored, activation of the Loss of Supply Detector
D outtput
requires (Uabc< OR Urst< OR (U Uabc< AND U Urst<)) AND Iabc<.
The LSDD_level is co V. Refer to section 5.2 foor details on how to chan
onfigurable between 0.5kkV and 6.0kV nge
the LSD_
_level setting
g.

86 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

6.9 Voltage Reclosing Control (VRC)


Voltage Reclosing Control (VRC) inhibits an auto reclose operation by any of AR OC/NPS/EF/SEF, AR VE
and ABR elements when voltage on the source side falls below a user set threshold. Correct application of
VRC prevents potentially hazardous backfeed situations from arising by isolating the source on perceived
loss of upstream supply during an operation to clear a downstream fault.
The recloser will attempt an auto reclose when VRC is no longer active. If VRC is active for longer than 200s
then the recloser will go to lockout and will not continue the auto reclose sequence.
Note: The VRC Blocking event will not start or record lockout as the relevant state when VRC blocking ends (after
200s) under the following conditions:
• Switch has transitioned to lockout by any other source.
• AutoClose Mode is enabled and the switch is open due to UV3.
• Switch is closed.
VRC has three operating modes. Two related to designation of source in radial protection applications and a
third for use in ring feed situations.
ABC The recloser A, B and C terminals are connected to the source side in a radial feed situation. In ABC
mode an auto reclose is blocked if any of the A, B, and C terminals see voltage below the VRC
threshold.
RST The recloser R, S and T terminals are connected to the source side in a radial feed situation. In RST
mode an auto reclose is blocked if any of the R, S, and T terminals see voltage below the VRC
threshold.
Ring In Ring Operating Mode, source and load cannot be determined. An auto reclose is allowed if only
one side of the open recloser sees voltage above the VRC threshold.
Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] GROUP 1 VOLTAGE RECLOSING CONTROL

Ø
VRC Mode ABC
[MAIN MENU] Voltage Multiplier 0.80
ª [Groups Settings]
LLB Disabled
ª [Group 1…4] Voltage Multiplier 0.80
ª Protection Settings: [VRC] ⇒

Note:
• When ABR is enabled it will automatically use the VRC mode settings. VRC does not need to be enabled.
VRC settings
Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default
VRC Mode VRC Mode ABC/RST/Ring NA ABC
Voltage Multiplier1 UM 0.6 – 0.95 0.01 0.80
Note:
1. VRC threshold equals UMin x U_rated / √3; where U_rated is the rated system voltage entered in the
measurement settings (refer page 48).

Summary VRC Operation


Mode A, B or C Terminal Voltage R, S or T Terminal Voltage Result
ABC Below Threshold Above or Below Threshold Reclose Blocked
Above Threshold Below Threshold Reclose Not Blocked
Above Threshold Above Threshold Reclose Blocked

OSM User Manual Protection 87


NOJA
A-5002-08

Mode A, B or C Terminal
T Volttage R, S or T Termin
nal Voltage Result
R
RST Above or Be
elow Threshol d Below
w Threshold Reclose Blocked
Below Thres
shold Abov
ve Threshold Reclose No
ot Blocked
Above Threshold Abov
ve Threshold Reclose Blocked
Ring Below Thres
shold Abov
ve Threshold Reclose No
ot Blocked
Above Threshold Below
w Threshold Reclose No
ot Blocked
Below Thres
shold Below
w Threshold Reclose Blocked
Above Threshold Abov
ve Threshold Reclose Blocked

6.9.1 Live
e Load Blocking ((LLB)
Live Loa
ad Blocking (LLB) preveents a close operation from
f any source (e.g. P Protection (AAR), HMI, CM MS,
SCADA, IO or Logic)) when the vo e nominated load side is above the thhreshold set by the user.
oltage on the

The loadd side is defined by the VRCV mode. If VRC is setup tor Ring then the LLB
B will block if both sides are
live and will not blockk if only one side is live.

If LLB is active and a close operation is issue ed from any source, the close comm
mand will be blocked
b and the
recloser will go to locckout. If ABR w force ABR Off.
R is ON, turniing LLB ON will

Panel Na
avigation GRO
OUP 1 VOLTA
AGE RECLOSI
ING CONTROL
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
VRC Mo
ode ABC
C
Ø Voltag
ge Multipli
ier 0.8
80
[MAIN M
MENU]
LLB Dis
sabled
ª [Groups Settings]
S Voltag
ge Multipli
ier 0.8
80
ª [G
Group 1…4]
ª Protection
P C] ⇒
Settings: [VRC]
LLB setttings
Title Designation
D Range Resoluttion Fa
actory Defaultt
LLB LLB Enabled
d/Disabled NA Disab
bled
Voltage M
Multiplier UM 0.6 – 0.95
0 0.01 0.80
Note:
• L
LLB threshold
d equals UM Min x U_rated d / √3; where
e U_rated is the rated syystem voltage
e entered in the
m
measurementt settings (refe
er page 48).
• L
Live Load Bloocking is a con
nfigurable settiting within eac
ch protection group.
g A globaal Live Load Blocking
B settin
ng is
a
available on th
he Protection Status Setting
gs Page to enable/disable all a of the Live LLoad Blocking
g group setting
gs.
Warning:

• L
LLB will not op
perate if Prote
ection is turned
d OFF.

6.10 Au
utomatic
c Backfe
feed Res
storatio
on (ABR
R)
Automattic backfeed restoration isi the processs whereby two feeders are tied by a “normally open” reclosser.
This reclloser monitors voltage us
sing voltage sensors on bothb Source and Load si de. If supply y is lost from the
Load sidde and powe er is present on the Sourrce side, then n the “tie-in” recloser willl close (afterr the configuured
restoratio
on time hass elapsed), restoring po ower by bac ckfeeding froom the non--faulted feed der. ABR has h
instantanneous reset time
t and thu
us the timer iss reset to zero when pow wer is restoreed.

88 Protectio
P on OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

ABR operation is dependent on the settings for Voltage Reclosing Control (VRC) including “VRC mode” and
“Min Voltage Multiplier” and Loss of Supply Detection (LSD) settings.
The source side is determined by the VRC mode i.e. ABC or RST. The Load side will be the other side of
the recloser. If VRC mode is set to Ring, ABR will operate on restoration of voltage to either (but not both)
sides of an open switch. The recloser can be set to automatically open again depending on the mode
selected for AutoOpen.
Note that enabling Live Line or disabling Protection or Auto Reclose automatically disables ABR. Closing the
Recloser by any means also disables ABR.
ABR can only be turned ON if the OSM is in the open position, Protection is ON, Auto Reclose is ON, Live
Line is OFF, LLB is OFF and ABR is enabled.
AutoOpen mode can be set to Timer Mode or Power Flow Mode. These modes cannot be enabled at the
same time.
Timer Mode
The recloser can be set to automatically open after a set period of time and re-enable ABR. If the Load side
still has no supply, ABR will then cause another close operation to occur (after 60ms). This cycle can be
limited to a set amount of operations. If AutoOpen Operations is set to 0 then there will be no limit to the
amount of AutoOpen/ABR operations.
Power Flow Mode
In this mode the recloser will be able to detect reduction and/or change in power flow direction and open
automatically without operator intervention.
If AutoOpen is pending the following actions will cancel AutoOpen operation:
• ABR turned OFF
• Protection turned OFF
• AR turned OFF
• Protection settings changed
• Protection Group changed
• Live Line or Hot Line Tag is turned ON
• Recloser Opens from any source.

Panel Navigation
GROUP 1 BACKFEED RESTORATION
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
ABR Mode Disabled
Ø
Restoration Time (s) 100.00
[MAIN MENU] AutoOpen Disabled
AutoOpen Time (m) 120
ª [Groups Settings]
AutoOpen Operations 1
ª [Group 1…4] Power Flow Dir Changed Disabled
ª Protection Settings: [ABR] ⇒ Power Flow Reduced Disabled
% of Power Flow Reduced 50
AutoOpen Time (s) 180

ABR settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


1
Operating Mode ABR Mode Enabled/Disabled NA Disabled
Restoration Time Tr 0 – 180 s 0.01 s 100.00
AutoOpen Mode Disabled/Timer/Power NA Disabled
Flow
Timer Mode2
AutoOpen Time (m) Tr, ,min 1 – 360 min 1 min 120
AutoOpen Operations OPS 0 – 10 1 1

OSM User Manual Protection 89


NOJA-5002-08

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Power Flow Mode2
Power Flow Dir Changed Power Flow Dir Enabled/Disabled NA Disabled
Changed
Power Flow Reduced Power Flow Enabled/Disabled NA Disabled
Reduced
% Power Flow Reduced % Power Flow 50-90% 1% 50
Reduced
AutoOpen Time (s) Tr, sec 1 – 300 s 1s 180
Note:
1. ABR global protection is automatically set to OFF on startup of the controller.
2. When the AutoOpen Operating Mode is set to Timer, the Timer fields will be displayed on the panel. When the
AutoOpen Operating mode it set to Powerflow then the PowerFlow mode fields will be displayed on the panel.

6.11 Auto Change Over (ACO)


The Auto Change over (ACO) system provides automatic switch over from one supply to another supply
source when the first supply becomes unavailable. This system requires two OSM Reclosers and two RC
controllers mounted back to back with a common load. A communication link is required between the two
controllers.
The two modes of operation are “Make Before Break” which allow restoration of supply without interruption
or “Break Before Make” which allows restoration of supply with momentary interruption of supply. Both
methods use a user set “ACO Time” between the opening and closing of the Reclosers.
The system also allows the two sources to be designated as ”Equal” or alternatively one being “Main” and
the other “Alternative”. This allows continuous supply from either source (whilst available) or switching back
to the preferred main source when available.
The changeover mechanism runs additional checks between the Reclosers using “Peer to Peer Protocol” for
communication.
ACO uses the protection element UV3 to determine if there has been a loss of supply and any of the voltage
and frequency protection elements that are enabled (set to reclose or lockout) to determine if a source is not
healthy.

The ACO scheme can only be enabled when the following conditions are met:
• One ACR must be open and one ACR must be closed.
• Protection must be On.
• LL, HLT, ABR, LLB, Synchronisation and Sectionaliser must be Off.
• At least the UV3 element must be set to lockout or reclose through the reclose map.
• The VRC source must be set to ABC or RST but not Ring.
• Both reclosers must be in a healthy state (no malfunctions or operational warnings).
• The communications link between the two reclosers must be healthy.
• “AR Timer Active” message must not displayed.

Refer to document NOJA-594 ACO User Manual for more detail.

90 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation Automation

[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ACO Auto-Synchroniser


ª [Automation]
ACO Off
ª [ACO] ⇒ Mode Break Before Make
ACO Time (s) 0.1
Peer Comms OK
ACR This ACR Remote ACR
Main Alt
Closed Open
ACO Health OK OK
Source Health OK OK

Information and other dynamic messaging

ACO settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


ACO1 ACO On/Off NA Off
Mode Mode Break Before Make/Make Before/Break NA Break Before Make
ACO Time ACO Time (s) 0 – 180 sec 0.1 sec 0.1
ACR ACR This ACR Main/Equal/Alt N/A Main
Note:
1. ACO is automatically set to Off on startup of the controller.

6.12 Synchronisation
The synchronisation functionality can be used to connect incoming generators to the grid and to re-establish
a connection between two parts of the network or two islanded systems.

Synchronisation is a global control which must be enabled to be able to use the Sync-Check and Auto-
Synchroniser functionality which operate in “Live Bus” / “Live Line” conditions:

• Sync-Check “supervises” the closing of a device and only allows a close when synchronising
conditions are met (refer to section 6.12.1 Synchronism-Check).
• Auto-Synchronisation can be initiated via the panel or CMS and it will wait for the auto-synchroniser
conditions to be met prior to requesting a close of the device (refer to 6.12.2 Auto-Synchroniser).

When synchronisation is enabled if the bus voltage or line voltage is less than the live voltage limit and
above the dead voltage limit i.e.

Dead Voltage Limit < Vbus < Live Voltage Limit or Dead Voltage Limit < Vline < Live voltage limit

any manual or automatic close will always be prevented.

A user can configure whether to allow or prevent a manual or automatic close under the following conditions:
• “Live Line” “Dead Bus” (LLDB)
• “Dead Line” “Live Bus” (DLLB)
• “Dead Line” “Live Bus” OR “Live Line” “Dead Bus” (DLLB or LLDB).

Note:
• When synchronisation is enabled, VRC and LLB will not operate and ABR and ACO are disabled.
• Synchronisation takes priority over Auto-Synchroniser even though they can work in parallel.

Please refer to Appendix C – Synchronisation for more details.

OSM User Manual Protection 91


NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation Synchronism Settings


[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
►General◄ Sync-Check Auto-Synchroniser
Ø
[MAIN MENU] Synchronisation Disabled
Phase Selection Phase to Ground
ª [System Settings]
Bus and Line: Bus: ABC & Line: RST
ª [Synchronism Settings] Live/Dead Autoreclose Disabled
DLDB Autoreclose Disabled
[General] ⇒
Live/Dead Manual Close Disabled
DLDB Manual Close Disabled
Live Bus Voltage Multiplier 0.80
Live Line Voltage Multiplier 0.80
Bus Max Voltage Multiplier 1.20
Line Max Voltage Multiplier 1.20
Voltage Difference Multiplier 0.05

Synchronism General Settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Synchronisation Synchronisation Enable/Disable N/A Disable
Phase Selection Phase Selection Phase to Ground/Phase to N/A Phase to
Phase Ground
Bus and Line Selection Bus and Line “Bus: ABC & Line: RST”/ N/A Bus: ABC &
“Bus: RST & Line: ABC” Line: RST
Live/Dead Auto-Reclose1 Live/Dead “Disabled”/ “LLDB” / N/A Disabled
Autoreclose “DLLB” / “LLDB or DLLB”
DLDB Autoreclose2 DLDB Autoreclose Enable/Disable N/A Disabled
Live/Dead Manual Close3 Live/Dead Manual “Disabled”/“LLDB”/“DLLB”/ N/A Disabled
Close “LLDB or DLLB”
DLDB Manual Close4 DLDB Manual Close Enable/Disable N/A Disabled
Live Bus Voltage Live Bus Voltage 0.3-1.2 0.01 0.8
5,10
Multiplier Multiplier
Live Line Voltage Live Line Voltage 0.3-1.2 0.01 0.8
Multiplier6,10 Multiplier
Bus Max Voltage Bus Maximum 0.8-1.4 0.01 1.2
Multiplier7,10 allowed Voltage
Live Max Voltage Live Maximum 0.8-1.4 0.01 1.2
8,10
Multiplier allowed Voltage
Voltage Difference Voltage Diff Multiplier 0.03-0.50 0.01 0.05
9,10
Multiplier

Notes:
1. Auto-reclose mode when energising a dead section of the network during synchronisation.
2. Auto-reclose mode in case of reconnection of two dead sections during synchronisation.
3. Manual close mode when energising a dead section of the network during synchronisation.
4. Manual close mode in case of reconnection of two dead sections during synchronisation.
5. Live bus minimum voltage limit for synchronisation.
6. Live line minimum voltage limit for synchronisation.
7. Bus maximum allowed voltage during synchronisation.
8. Line maximum allowed voltage during synchronisation.
9. Maximum allowable voltage difference for synchronisation

92 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-008

10. M
Minimum and d maximum vo oltage limits eequal Multiplie
er x U_rated where U_rateed is the rated
d system volttage
e
entered in me easurement settings
s (referr to section 5..2). (Note: When
W Phase too Ground is selected
s then the
m fer to U_rated / √3).
multipliers refe

6.12.1 Synchronism
m-Check
k
Synchronism-check (25) “superv vises” the cloosing of a device and only allows a cclose when both sides of the
recloser are within th
he desired limits of frequ
uency, phase e angle and voltage to ppermit the pa
aralleling of two
circuits.
Synchronism Checkk will only op perate for “L
Live Bus” / “Live
“ Line” conditions.
c T
The “Bus” an nd “Line” of the
recloser and the “Livve” condition
ns can be cconfigured un nder the General tab (reefer to sectio
on 6.12). Wh hen
Synchronisation-Che eck is enableed, synchron ising conditio
ons must be met for the dduration of a pre-configu
ured
time (pre
e-sync time) before allow
wing a close o
of the devicee.
If the request to close occurs due to an au to reclose sequence, the pre-sync ttime delay is
s fixed at 80
0ms
whereass for a manua al close it can be set by tthe user (manual pre-sync time).
Synchronisation musst be enabled
d for Synchro
onism-Check
k to be opera
ational (refer to section 6.12).

Panel Na
avigation Synchro
onism Settings
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Genera
al ►Sync-Ch
heck◄ Auto-
-Synchronis
ser
Ø
[MAIN M
MENU] Sync-Check Disabl
led
Max Sy
ync Slip Fr
requency (H
Hz) 0.
.03
ª [System Settings]
S
ference (o)
Phase Angle Diff 20
ª [S
Synchronism
m Settings] Manual Pre-Sync Time (s) 5
[Sync-Check] ⇒

Sync-Ch
heck Settingss

Factory
Title Design
nation Ra
ange R
Resolution
Default
Sync-C
Check Sync
c-Check Enable/Disable N
N/A Disable
Max S
Sync Slip Max Sync Slip Fre
equency, Hz 0.03-0.1
1 Hz 0..01Hz 0.03 Hz
ency1
Freque
2 0 00 0
Phase
e Angle Differe
ence Phas
se Angle Diffe rence, deg 0-90 1 20
Manua
al Pre-Sync Tiime Manu
ual Pre-Sync T
Time, s 0-60 sec
c 1 5 sec

Notes:
1. MMaximum slip p frequency too detect synchhronous cond ditions. A moving average oof 32 samples s at quarter cyycle
rrate on the 2 frequencies (AABC and RST T) is provided to compare fbus and fline. Thhe frequency difference sho
ould
bbe minimised to practical re
esponse limita
ations.

2. MMaximum allo owable phase angle differen nce for synchro


onisation. A cllose should iddeally take place when the ABC
A
aand RST side es of the recloser are at zerro degrees phase angle diffference. To acccomplish this s, the recloserr will
iinitiate a close
e in advance ofo phase angle e coincidence to accommod date for the reccloser closing time.

6.12.2
2 Auto
o-Synchrroniser

OSM User Ma
anual Pro
otection 93
NOJA-5002-08

The Auto-Synchroniser functionality (25A) is used for the connection of incoming generators to the grid or
the re-establishment of the connection between two islanded systems. When Auto-Synchroniser is initiated,
it will wait for the auto-synchroniser conditions to be met prior to requesting a close of the device. If the
conditions are not met within the Auto-sync waiting time then a close will not be requested.
Auto-Synchroniser is only operational in Live Line/Live Bus conditions, when the device is open and when
Synchronisation has been enabled (refer to section 6.12). It can be initiated via the HMI panel, I/O, SCADA ,
CMS, Logic and SGA. The Auto-Syncroniser tab will only appear when Synchronisation is enabled.
“Anti-Motoring” can be used to prevent motoring condition and prime mover damage. When “Anti-Motoring”
is enabled the following conditions must be met for auto-synchroniser to be operational:
Vbus_rms ≥ 1.025 × Vline_rms
fbus -fline ≥ 0.01 Hz.
Panel Navigation Synchronism Settings
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
General Sync-Check ►Auto-Synchroniser◄
Ø
[MAIN MENU] Fundamental Frequency (Hz) 50
Max Frequency Deviation (Hz) 0.50
ª [System Settings]
Max Slip Frequency (Hz) 0.10
ª [Synchronism Settings] Max ROC Slip Freq (Hz/Sec) 0.2
Auto-sync Waiting Time (s) 200
[Auto-Synchroniser] ⇒
Anti-Motoring Enabled

Auto-Synchroniser Settings

Factory
Title Designation Range Resolution
Default
Fundamental Frequency (Hz) 1 Fundamental Frequency, Hz 47-64 Hz 1 Hz 50 Hz
Max Frequency Deviation (Hz) Max Frequency Deviation, 0 to 1 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.5 Hz
Hz
Max Slip Frequency (Hz)2 Max Slip Frequency, Hz 0.03 to 0.5 Hz 0.01 Hz 0.1 Hz
Max Rate of Change of (ROC) Max ROC Slip Frequency, 0.01-1Hz/sec 0.01 Hz/Sec 0.25 Hz/Sec
Slip Frequency2 Hz/s
Auto-sync Waiting Time Auto-sync Waiting Time, s 100-3600 Sec 1 200
Anti-Motoring Anti-Motoring Enable/Disable N/A Enabled
Notes:
1. Fundamental frequency for Synchronism to determine the deviation from "normal".
2. A moving average of 32 samples at quarter cycle rate on the 2 frequencies (ABC and RST) is provided to
compare fbus and fline.

Automation
Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ACO Auto-Synchroniser

ª [Automation]
Auto-Synchroniser Initiate/Cancel
ª [Auto-Synchroniser] ⇒
Synchronising status OK
Voltage status OK
Slip Frequency Status OK
Advance Angle Status OK
Phase Angle Difference (o) -10

94 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

6.13 Harmonic Protection


The RC Power Quality System provides monitoring and protection features for power quality issues such as
Harmonics Distortion, Interruptions, and Sags and Swells (Refer to section 7.7 Power Quality).

Harmonics are waves which have frequency multiples of the fundamental frequency. Distortions due to
harmonics are measured in two separate methods, known as Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) and Total
Demand Distortion (TDD). THD is a ratio between the fundamental voltage wave and all the voltage
harmonics. TDD is used to calculate the current distortion relative to the peak current demand.

The system provides harmonic protection by allowing the user to configure responses such as triggering an
alarm or a trip.

The RC controller measures THD, TDD, Individual Harmonics for Current and Voltage (HRMI and HRMV) up
to the 15th harmonic. The signals are the 3 bushing voltages (Ua, Ub, Uc), 3 phase currents and the neutral
current.

Protection
• The user can configure a set point for each harmonic and for the total harmonic distortion. If a value
exceeds any of the set points then an alarm or lockout is triggered.
• Up to five individual harmonics can be user selected and monitored.
• Protection and measurements are based on the bushing phase configuration.
• The TDD and current harmonic protection will not pick up when the current of any phase exceeds
800A rms.

Groups Settings - THD/TDD Settings


Panel Navigation GROUP x Harmonics
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
►THD/TDD◄ INDIVIDUAL HRM
Ø
[MAIN MENU] Voltage THD Disabled
Voltage THD Level (%) 5.0
ª [Groups Settings] Voltage THD Tripping Time (s) 1.0
ª [Group 1 Feeder]
Current TDD Mode Disabled
ª Protection Settings: [HRM]
Current TDD Level (%) 5.0
[THD/TDD] ⇒ Current TDD Tripping Time (s) 1.0

THD/TDD Settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Voltage THD THD Mode Disable/Alarm/Lockout N/A Disable
Voltage THD Level1 THD % 1.0 to 100.0 0.1 5.0

Voltage THD Tripping Time (s) THD Time 1.0 to 120.0 0.1 1.0

Current TDD Mode2 TDD Mode Disable/Alarm/Lockout N/A Disable

Current TDD Level TDD Level 1.0 to 100.0 0.1 5.0

Current TDD Tripping Time (s) TDD Time 1.0 to 120.0 0.1 1.0

Notes:
1. The tripping condition is met if any one of Ua, Ub, or Uc voltages exceeds the threshold.
2. The tripping condition is met if any one of Ia, Ib, Ic, or In currents exceeds the threshold. 

OSM User Manual Protection 95


NOJA-5002-08

GROUP x Harmonics
Individual HRM Settings
THD/TDD ►INDIVIDUAL HRM◄
Panel Navigation
Individual Harmonics Mode Disabled
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
Individual Tripping Time (s) 1.0
Ø Harmonic A Disabled
Level A (%) 5.0
[MAIN MENU]
Harmonic B Disabled
ª [Groups Settings] Level B (%) 5.0
ª [Group 1 Feeder] Harmonic C Disabled
Level C (%) 5.0
ª Protection Settings: [HRM] Harmonic D Disabled
[Individual HRM] ⇒ Level D (%) 5.0
Harmonic E Disabled
Level E (%) 5.0

Individual HRM Settings

Factory
Title Designation Range Resolution
Default
Individual Harmonics Mode IND Mode Disable/Alarm/Lockout N/A Disable
Individual Tripping Time (s) IND Time 0.5 to 120.0 0.1 1.0
Harmonic A IND A Name Disable/I2/I3/I4/....In15/ N/A Disable
....V15
Level A (%) IND A Level 1 to 100 0.1 5.0
Harmonic B IND_B Name Disable/I2/I3/I4/....In15/ N/A Disable
....V15
Level B (%) IND_B Level 1 to 100 0.1 5.0
Harmonic C IND_C Name Disable/I2/I3/I4/....In15/ N/A Disable
....V15
Level C (%) IND_C Level 1 to 100 0.1 5.0
Harmonic D IND_D Name Disable/I2/I3/I4/....In15/ N/A Disable
....V15
Level D (%) IND_D Level 1 to 100 0.1 5.0
Harmonic E IND_E Name Disable/I2/I3/I4/....In15/ N/A Disable
....V15
Level E (%) IND_E Level 1 to 100 0.1 5.0
 
The following individual harmonics can be selected (ITDD and UTHD values apply across all three phases): 
• Disable
• I2, I3, I4, I5, I6, I7, I8, I9, I10, I11, I12, I13, I14, I15
• In2, In3, In4, In5, In6, In7, In8, In9, In10, In11, In12, In13, In14, In15
• V2, V3, V4, V5, V6, V7, V8, V9, V10, V11, V12, V13, V14, V15

96 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

6.14 Protection Status Control (PSC)


Protection Status Control allows global changes to protection status from a variety of sources. Changes to
PSC status can be done from the Panel, Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA) systems, digital
input and output (I/O) interface or Personal Computer running the CMS software program.
The table below lists the available PSC elements. Setting an element to the indicated state causes the PSC
to change all associated protection elements as shown.
Note that Live Line is unique in that it causes elements to be disabled when turned ON or OFF. Setting any
other element to ON simply enables all affected elements.

PSC Element Effect on associated protection elements Factory Default


S(Active Group)=1-4 1 All protection elements for the identified group are enabled 3. 1
All protection elements for all other groups are disabled.
S(Protection)= Off 2 All protection elements for all groups are disabled. Off
S(AR)=Off 2 AR OC/NPS/EF/SEF, AR VE, ABR for all groups are disabled Off
2
S(LL)=On OC1+, OC2+, OC3+, OC1- ,OC2- , OC3- , NPS1+, NPS2+, NPS3+, Off
NPS1-, NPS2-, NPS3-, EF1+, EF2+, EF3+, EF1-, EF2- , EF3- ,
SEF+, SEF–, AR OC/EF/NPS/SEF, AR VE, ABR, CLP, IR for all
groups are disabled
S(LL)=Off 2 OCLL1-3, NPSLL1-3, EFLL1-3, SEFLL for all groups are disabled Off
2
S(EF)=Off EF1+, EF2+ , EF3+ , EF1-, EF2-, EF3- for all groups are disabled Off
S(SEF)=Off 2 SEF+, SEF– for all groups are disabled Off
S(CLP)=Off 2 CLP for all groups is disabled Off
2
S(ABR)=Off ABR for all groups is disabled Off
S(UV)=Off2 UV1, UV2 and UV3 for all groups are disabled Off
S(UV4 Sag)=Off UV4 Sag for all groups are disabled Off
S(HLT - Hot Line Hot Line Tag is disabled Off
Tag)=Off2
S(NPS)=Off NPS1+, NPS2+, NPS3+, NPS1-, NPS2-, NPS3- for all groups are Off
disabled
S(OV)=Off2 OV1, OV2, OV3 and OV4 for all groups are disabled Off
S(OV3) OV3 for all groups is disabled Off
S(Yn) Yn for all groups is disabled Off
S(UF)=Off UF for all groups is disabled Off
S(OF)=Off OF for all groups is disabled Off
S(HRM)=Off HRM elements for all groups are disabled Off
S(HLT - Link HLT to Link HLT to LL Off
LL)=Off
S(MNT)=Off Maximum Number of Trips for all groups is disabled Off
S(SSM)=Off Short Sequence Mode for all groups is disabled Off
S(DFT)=Off Disable Fast Trips for all groups is disabled Off
S(Alarm Mode)=Off Alarm Mode for all groups is disabled Off
S (LLB)=Off Live Load Blocking for all groups is disabled Off
S(79-2 Lockout)=Off 79-2 Lockout for all groups is disabled Off
S(79-3 Lockout)=Off 79-3 Lockout for all groups is disabled Off
S(ACO)=Off2 Auto Change Over for all groups is disabled Off
S(Logical Block Logical Block Close for all groups is disabled Off
Close)=Off
Notes:
1. When Group 1 is switched ON, other Groups are automatically switched OFF.
2. On / Off control available from the Panel fast keys (depending on fast key configuration option).
3. Conditional to the fact if element is enabled.

OSM User Manual Protection 97


NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation
PROTECTION GLOBAL SETTINGS
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS]
ª [Protection] ►Page 1◄ Page 2 Page 3

ª [Page 1] Active Group 1


Protection Off
AR Auto Reclose Off
LL Live Line Off
EF Earth Fault Off
SEF Sensitive Earth Fault Off
CLP Cold Load Pickup Off
ABR Autobackfeed Restore Off
UV Undervoltage Off
U UV4 Sag Off
L LLB Live Load Blocking Off
H HLT Hot Line Tag Off

Panel Navigation PROTECTION GLOBAL SETTINGS


[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS]
Page 1 ►Page 2◄ Page 3
ª [Protection]
ª [Page 2] NPS Negative Sequence Off
OV Over Voltage Off
UF Under Frequency Off
OF Over Frequency Off
HRM Harmonics Off
HLT Link HLT to LL Off
MNT Maximum Number of Trips Off
SSM Short Sequence Mode Off
DFT Disable Fast Trips Off
Max No. of Trips to Lockout Normal
Alarm mode Off

Panel Navigation PROTECTION GLOBAL SETTINGS


[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS]
Page 1 Page 2 ►Page 3◄
ª [Protection]
ª [Page 3] OV3 Neutral Displacement Off
Yn Admittance Protection Off

98 Protection OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation Automation


[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS]
ACO Off
ª [Automation] Mode Break Before Make
ª [ACO] ⇒ ACO Time (s) 0.1
Peer Comms OK
ACR This ACR Remote ACR
Main Alt
Closed Open
ACO Health OK OK
Source Health OK OK

Information and other dynamic messaging

OSM User Manual Protection 99


NOJA-5002-08

7 Monitoring
The RC Cubicle generates and maintains the following records:
• Close / Open (CO) operations OSM operation data
• Fault Profile Fault episode data
• Event log Event data
• Change Log Setting and status change data
• Load Profile Energy, Frequency, Real, Reactive and Active Power profile data
See full listing Section 7.5
• Lifetime Counters Number of Close Open operations and associated Contact Wear
• Fault Counters Number of Protection Trips
• SCADA Counters Communication Protocol Data
• Power Quality Oscillography, Harmonics, Interruption, Sags/Swells
• Maximum Demand Indication
Records and counters are accessible via the panel or can be captured via the CMS software. To analyse
power quality data the Power Quality Software (PQS) is used.
Note:
• Fault and SCADA counters can be reset but not logs.

7.1 Communication Log Settings


A trace logging of protocol information can be enabled for each of the protocols. A USB flash drive must be
plugged into one of the USB relay ports and left plugged in for the logging to be saved to (communication
logs are not stored on the relay). Please refer to NOJA-565 RC SCADA Interface Description for more
details.

COMMs LOG SETTINGS


Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] DNP3 Data Logging <Disabled>
DNP3 Max Log size (MB) <2>
Ø
IEC 60870 Data Logging <Disabled>
[MAIN MENU] IEC 60870 Max Log size (MB) <2>
CMS Data Logging <Disabled>
ª [System Settings] ⇒
CMS Max Log size (MB) <2>
ª [Comms Log Settings] ⇒ IEC 61850 Data Logging <Disabled>
IEC 61850 Max Log size (MB) <2>
P2PComms Data Logging <Disabled>
P2PComms Max Log size (MB) <2>
Panel Data Logging <Disabled>
Panel Max Log size (MB) <2>
GPS Data Logging <Disabled>
GPS Max Log size (MB) <2>

Notes:
• Logging for only one protocol can be enabled at any one time. Enabling data logging for one protocol will
disable data logging for an already enabled protocol.
• Must eject USB flash drive through USB operations before unplugging otherwise data may be lost.

100 Monitoring OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

7.2 Close Open (CO) Operations


This record registers the last 1,000 Closed/Open events associated with changes in OSM position.
The CO Operations log is accessible via the Panel or can be captured using CMS software.
Panel Navigation LOGS
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
<Close/Open> Event
Ø
[MAIN MENU] ►18/02/2013 04:42:16 PM Open UV3◄
18/02/2013 04:42:06 PM Close HMI
ª [Logs] ⇒ 18/02/2013 04:42:03 PM Open HMI
ª [CLOSE/OPEN] ⇒
Source: UV3
State: Lockout
Trip (Ia), A=0
Trip (Ib), A=0 Trip (Ic), A=0
Trip (In), A=0

CLOSE/OPEN OPERATION DETAIL

Date/time: 18/02/2013 04:42:16.702 PM


Type: Open
ª [Select any Close/Open entry for detail] ⇒ Source: UV3
State: Lockout

Critical Parameters:
Trip (Ia), A=0
Trip (Ib), A=0
Trip (Ic), A=0
Trip (In), A=0

Each event is described by the following characteristics.


• Date and time event registered
• Event title (Open/Closed)
• Source of event
• Relevant state
• Critical parameter
• Currents at time of initiation of trip command.

OSM User Manual Monitoring 101


NOJA-5002-08

The table below provides further information on CO Operation events.


Applicable sources
Event Relevant state Critical parameter
of event
Open Any protection Open 1 (Lockout) Values registered between pickup start and open
element or events
Operated by means Open 2/Open 3/Open 4 Maximum phase current (Max(Ia) / Max(Ib) / Max(Ic))
of HMI, CMS, I/O, (waiting to reclose) for OC elements
SCADA or Maximum residual current (Max(In)) for EF and SEF
mechanical trip ring elements
Note: For any protection
element that does not have Maximum negative sequence current Max(I2) for NPS
an auto reclose map the elements
relevant state is blank
Max (I2/I1) registered in pickup duration and
unless it is in Lockout State
protection operation currents, {Trip(Ia), Trip(Ib), Trip(Ic),
and Trip(In)}.
Max(Gn FWD) = Maximum Recorded Conductance
during fault when “forward conductance” exceeded for
Yn
Max(Bn FWD) = Maximum Recorded Susceptance
during fault when “forward Susceptance” exceeded for
Yn
Min(Gn REV) = Minimum Recorded Conductance
during fault when “reverse conductance” exceeded for
Yn
Min(Bn REV) = Minimum Recorded Susceptance during
fault when “reverse Susceptance” exceeded for Yn
Minimum positive sequence voltage (Min(U1)) for UV1
Minimum line to line voltage (Min(Uab) / Min(Ubc) /
Min(Uca)) for UV2
Maximum positive sequence voltage (Max(U1)) for OV1
Maximum line to line voltage (Max(Uab) / Max(Ubc) /
Max(Uca)) for OV2
Max (Un) registered in pickup duration and
protection operation currents, {Trip(Ia), Trip(Ib), Trip(Ic)
and Trip(In)} for OV3.
Max (U2) registered in pickup duration and
protection operation currents, {Trip(Ia), Trip(Ib), Trip(Ic)
and Trip(In)} for OV4.
Minimum frequency (Min(F)) for UF
Maximum frequency (Max(F)) for OF
Maximum of any of the following: THD, TDD, A,B,C,D,E
(where A,B,C,D,E are individual harmonics selected by
the user)
Min UV4Sag for UV4 Sag
Sectionaliser Lockout Maximum current during fault in Sectionaliser mode
(recorded from pickup through to LSD)
UV3 Open UV3 AutoClose
Open UV3 Trip(Ia), A=0; Trip(Ib), A=0; Trip(Ic), A=0; Trip(In), A=0
AutoOpen Power Open ABR
Flow Dir Changed

AutoOpen Power Open ABR


Flow Reduced

102 Monitoring OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

Applicable sources
Event Relevant state Critical parameter
of event
Closed Any Auto Reclose Close 2/Close 3/Close 4
element, ABR, HMI, for
SCADA, PC, I/O, AR OC/NPS/EF/SEF/Yn
ACO
ARVE OV/UV

Close 0 or Close 1 for


others

Note: For any protection


element that does not have
an auto reclose map the
relevant state is blank.
UV3 AutoClose

7.3 Fault Profile


The Fault Profile is made up of records related to each of the last 8 protection trip operations caused by any
protection element. The fault profile is not visible on the Panel and can be viewed using CMS software.
Each record includes Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Ua, Ub, Uc, Uab, Ubc, Uca, U1, F, A0 and A1 values logged for each cycle
of power frequency for up to 1 second prior to trip operation. The values for each cycle are identified by a
sequential number from 1 to 50. The record with the highest sequential number is the time at which the
OSM tripped.

7.4 Event log


The Event Log registers up to 10,000 events associated with changes of particular signals or parameters.
The Event Log is visible on the Panel and can also be viewed using CMS software. Each event is described
by the following characteristics:
• Date and time registered
• Event title
• Source of event
• Relevant phase
• Critical parameter.
For the full list of Events, refer to Appendix G – Events.

7.5 Change Log


The Change Log record contains up to 1,000 events associated with changes of settings, protection status,
external load status, control mode or erasing energy meter readings and fault counters. The Change
Messages log is not visible on the Panel but can be captured using CMS software. Each event is described
by the following:
• Date and Time of change
• Changed parameter
• Old value
• New value
• Source of change (HMI, CMS, SCADA, I/O)
For a full list of Change Log Messages, refer to Appendix H – Change Log Messages.

OSM User Manual Monitoring 103


NOJA
A-5002-08

7.6 Load Proffile


This log registers up to 10,000 readings off Load Profile data. Up to 30 itemss can be selected for eaach
interval rrecord. Thesse are config PC using the CMS softwa
gured by a P are packagee. Data that can
c be seleccted
for recorrding includes:
• C
Current on all
a three phas
ses and neuttral
• Phase to gro
ound voltage on each busshing
• Phase to pha
ase voltages
s
• T
Three phase
e and single phase
p Active
e, Apparent and
a Reactive
e Power
• T
Three phase
e and single phase
p Powe
er Factor
• Frequency on
o ABC and RST
R
• Lifetime Ene ard and reve rse power flo
ergy in forwa e phase Active,
ow direction. Three phasse and single
A
Apparent and Reactive.
• Energy usedd per Load Profile
P Interva
al in forward and reverse
e power flow direction. Th
hree phase and
a
ssingle phase
e Active, App
parent and RReactive.
• Positive and Negative Se
equence Currrent
• gative and Zero Sequencce Voltage
Positive, Neg
• Battery Volta
age, Current and Capacitty
• S
SIM Module Temperature and Powerr
The read
dings are avveraged over a pre-set ttime interval 1/5/10/15/2
20/30/60/120 min. If a 1 minute interrval
was sele
ected, 10,000
0 records wo
ould give 6.9
9 days of data. If a 120 minute
m intervaal was selected there wo
ould
be 832 d
days of data. When the RC
R reaches 10,000 readings it will sta art discardingg the oldest records.
Each loa ading is provided with a d
ad profile rea date and time e Load profilee is not visib
e stamp. The ble on the Pa
anel
be captured using CMS software.
but can b s

7.7 Co
ounters
The RCC monitors the number of operation ns and eneergy throughput during a fault and calculates the
percenta
age of contacct wear rema
aining after e
each Close – Open opera
ation.
Two lifettime counterss are maintained, one forr mechanism
m wear and th
he other for ccontact wearr.
Fault cou
unters provid ber and type of each faultt the OSM haas operated for.
de indication of the numb
Counterss can be reset via the operator panel from Main Menu
M set Menu or vvia CMS.
- > Res

7.7.1 Lifettime cou


unters
Lifetime counters calculate and record
r the to
otal number of
o Close Ope en (CO) Opeerations and the mechanical
and conttact wear. Th
hey are acce
essible via the
e Panel or ca
an be capturred using CM
MS software.
• T
Total CO Opperations – A close operration and th ent open opeeration are trreated as a CO
he subseque
O
Operation.
• Mechanical wear – The value is callculated as a ratio of the
e total numbber of CO op
perations to the
rrated OSM mechanical
m life and expre
essed as a percentage.
• CContact wea ar – The value is calcula
ated for eac
ch phase using a recurreent formula to
t calculate the
ttotal contact wear consumed after ea
ach interruptiion.
T
The Maximu
um recalculatted wear on a
any of the three phases is
i recorded aas a percenta
age
Values a
are calculated and update
ed after each
h Close Open (CO) Operration.

104 Monitorin
M ng OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
LIFETI
IME COUNTER
RS
Ø
[MAIN M
MENU] Close/
/Open Total
l 100
Mechan
nical Wear (%) 1.00
ª [Counterss] Contac
ct Wear (%)
) 2.00
ª [L nters] ⇒
Lifetime Coun

7.7.2 Faullt counte


ers
Fault cou
unters record
d the number of protectio
on operations
s (faults) provided by eacch of the follo
owing
Phase Overcurrent
O (OC) (per pha
ase) Negative Ph
hase Sequennce (NPS)
Earth Fa
ault (EF) Sensitive Ea
arth Fault (SE
EF)
Frequen
ncy Protection (FE) Voltage Prottection (VE)
Recordss are calculaated and upd dated after each protec on (fault). T hey are acc
ction operatio cessible via the
Panel orr can be capttured using CMS
C softwarre.

Panel Na
avigation FAUL
LT COUNTERS
S

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Page 1 ►Page 2
2◄
Ø
OC A 12
[MAIN M
MENU]
OC B 10
ª [Counterss] OC C 15
EF 22
Fault Counterrs] ⇒
ª [F
SEF 3
e 1] ⇒
ª [Page NPS 0
I2/I1 0
Yn 0
UF 0
OF 0

Panel Na
avigation
FAUL
LT COUNTERS
S
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Ø Page 1 ►Page 2
2◄
[MAIN M
MENU]
UV 0
ª [Counterss] OV 0
HRM 0
Fault Counterrs] ⇒
ª [F
e 2] ⇒
ª [Page

OSM U
User Man
nual Mo
onitoring
g 105
NOJA
A-5002-08

7.7.3 SCA
ADA Counters
The SCA
ADA counterrs record data
a which can assist with commissionin
c ng and testinng communic
cations links.
Panel Na
avigation SCADA COUNTERS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Call Dro
op outs 0
Ø Calls Fa
ailed 0
Tx Frame
es 32
[MAIN M
MENU] Rx Frame
es 56
ª [C
Counters] Length Errors 0
CRC Erro
ors 0
DA Counterss] ⇒
ª [SCAD C1 Buffe
er 1
12
C2 Buffe
er 0
C3 Buffe
er 0

7.7.4 DNP
P3-SA Co
ounters
The DNP3-SA coun nters record data which can assist with
w monitorring DNP3 ssecurity such
h as monitorring
session key changess, error mess
sages and au
uthentication
n failures.

DNP3-S
SA COUNTERS
S
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Unexpect
ted Message
es 0
Ø Authoriz
zation Fail
lures 0
Authentication Fai
ilures 0
[MAIN M
MENU] Reply Timeouts 0
ª [C
Counters] Rekeys Due
D to Auth
h. Failure 0
Total Me
essages Sen
nt 0
ª [DNP ers] ⇒
P3-SA Counte Total Me
essages Rec
ceived 0
Critical Messages Sent 0
Critical Messages Received 0
Discarde
ed Messages
s 0
Error Me
essages Sen
nt 0
Error Me
essages Rxe
ed 0
Successf
ful Authent
tications 0
Session Key Change
es 0
Failed Session
S Key
y Changes 0

7.7.5 GOO
OSE Cou
unters
The GOO
OSE counterrs record sub
bscription an
nd publishing
g of GOOSE messages foor the IEC 61
1850 protoco
ol.

Panel Na
avigation GOOSE COUNTERS
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Subscrib
bed GOOSE M
Messages 0
Ø Publishe
ed GOOSE Me
essages 0
[MAIN M
MENU]
ª [C
Counters]
OSE Counterrs] ⇒
ª [GOO

106 Monitorin
M ng OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

7.8 Fault Flags


Fault Flags are set when a protection operation has been initiated e.g. Open(OC) is set when the recloser
has opened due to overcurrent protection.

Fault flags are automatically reset when the switch transitions from open to close if “Reset Fault Flags on
Close” is enabled which is the default setting.
Panel Navigation FAULT FLAGS
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
Reset Fault Flags on close Enabled
Ø
Display Alerts Disabled
[MAIN MENU] Alarm Not Latched
ª [System Settings]
ª [Fault Flags] ⇒

Fault Flags Settings


Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default
Reset Fault Flags on Reset Fault Flags on Close Enabled/Disabled N/A Enabled
Close
Display Alerts Display Alerts Enabled/Disabled N/A Disabled
Alarm Latching Alarm Latching Latched/Not Latched N/A No Latched

Note: If “Reset Flags on Close” is enabled any alarm flag will also be reset on a close operation if the alarm is latched.
Refer to section 6.2.14 Alarm Latching.

Fault flags can be reset manually from the panel via the Reset Menu or through SCADA or Logic (refer to
relevant SCADA protocol document for more details).

Panel Navigation
RESET MENU
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
Energy Meters
Ø
Fault Counters
[MAIN MENU] SCADA Counters
ª [Reset Menu] DNP3-SA Counters
GOOSE Counters
ª [Reset Fault Flags] ⇒ Reset Hot Line Tag
Oscillography records
Interruption Counters and Duration
Sag/Swell Counters and Duration
Reset Logical Block Close
Reset Binary Fault Targets
Reset GPS Hardware
Reset Wi-Fi Hardware
Reset Mobile Network Modem

Note: “Reset Binary Fault Flags” will also reset any alarm flags. Refer to section 6.2.14 Alarm Latching.

OSM User Manual Monitoring 107


NOJA
A-5002-08

7.9 Us
ser Notiffication
ns
Notifications are disp
played on the e panel to in form the ope erator when particular evvents are gen
nerated. The ese
include AAlerts, Warnnings and Malfunctions a and will be displayed
d in the correspponding tabs s in the Systtem
Status MMenu. If an allert is active, the Alert tab
b will be disp
played when the panel is turned on.

Warning gs and Malfunctions are automaticallyy generated by the relay y. For a list oof indication signals, plea
ase
refer to ssection 11.6.. Alerts on th
he other han d, are config
gured and enabled in CMMS.

7.9.1 Con
nfiguring Alerts
Alerts ca
an include “O
Open” fault fla
ags and any other logic signal
s (using variables VA
AR1 to VAR3
32).

Alerts arre configuredd in CMS fro om the Alertss tab in Logic settings. You
Y will noticce that a number of “Op pen”
alerts arre already avvailable. To display an a alert on the panel, you must
m enable the individual alert and the
“Alerts” mmode. Additiional alerts can
c be seleccted from any y of the avaiilable “Open”” fault flags or any variab
ble.
Refer to CMS Help File
F for more details.

The “Ale
erts” mode ca
an also be en
nabled via th
he panel by enabling
e “Dis
splay Alerts”.

The Alerts tab will only


o be visib
ble if any off the configu a enabled and active. The Alerts tab
ured Alerts are
includes “Reset Bina ary Fault Tarrgets” which allows the user
u to manuually reset anny of the fau
ult flags (“Op
pen”
or “Alarm
m” flags). Reffer to section
n 7.8 Fault F lags and the
e CMS Help File
F for moree details.

Panel Na
avigation FAULT
T FLAGS
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Reset Fault
F Flags
s on close Enabled
d
Ø Display
y Alerts Disabled
d
Alarm Not
N Latched
d
[MAIN M
MENU]
ª [System Settings]
S
Fault Flags] ⇒
ª [F

Panel Na
avigation SYST
TEM STATUS

►ALERTS
S◄ GENERAL WARNING MALFUNCTIO
ON
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS]
ª [Alerts] <Reset Binary Fau
ult Targets
s>

Open(Pr
rot) O
Open(OV)
Open(Ph
hA) O
Open(UF)
Open(Ph
hB) O
Ope(OF)
Open(Ph
hC) O
Open(Yn)
Open(Ph
hN) V
VAR1
Open(OC
C) V
VAR12
Open(EF
F) V
VAR32
Open(SE
EF)
Open(NP
PS)
Open(UV
V)

108 Monitorin
M ng OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

7.10 Ma
aximum Deman
nd Indic
cation (M
MDI)
MDI is im
mplemented as Protocol Points only a and report on
nly values of currents (Ia,, Ib, Ic and In
n). The RMS
S
value of current in ph
hases A, B, C and In are averaged in accordance e with Load PProfile configuration. See
Binary C
Counters, doccument NOJA A-522 RC D NP3 Device Profile, and Integrated T Totals, docum ment NOJA-
5604 RC C IEC60870-5-101 and 10 04 Protocol IImplementattion.
Load Pro ofile is user configurable
e for the inte
ervals of 1/2
2/5/10/15/30/60/120 minuutes. For cus stomer, to ha
ave
average MDI time off 15 minutes, the Load P Profile time must
m t 15 minute s. All of the MDI values are
be set to
volatile a
and will be re
eset back to zero when thhe controller is reset.
The MDII records are
e reported as
s for TODAY,, YESTERDA
AY and LAST
T WEEK.
Definitions of these are:
a
• T
The TODAY
Y Load Profile
e is monitore
ed for the highest value in
n the recordss from last midnight till no
ow.
• TThe YESTER RDAY Load Profile is mo
onitored for the highest value
v in the records for the
t 24 hourss till
llast midnightt.
• T
The LAST WEEK
W Load Profile is m
monitored forr the highest record durring the last 7 days till last
midnight.
The valuues for recorrd types (YESSTERDAY a and LAST WEEK) are up
pdated only oon expiration
n of the relevvant
period. T
The value forr record type TODAY is u
updated when a new max
ximum for TOODAY is deteected.

7.11 Po
ower Qu
uality
The RC Power Quality System provides
p monnitoring and protection fe
eatures for poower quality issues such
h as
Harmoniics Distortion
n, Interruptions, and Sagss and Swells
s. The system:
• uses the “F Fast Fourierr Transform”” or FFT alg gorithm to provide
p exacct values for the harmo onic
frequency and
a its magniitude
• captures an n oscillogram of the wave
eform (IEEE COMTRADE E format)
• captures infformation for short and loong interruptions (IEEE P1159.3
P PQDDIF format)
• records the number of sags and swe ells (IEEE P1
1159.3 PQDIF format).

Data is logged and can be analysed to dettermine the power qualitty flowing th rough the device using the
Power QQuality Software (PQS) in
nstalled on a PC.

The systtem providess protection byb allowing tthe user to configure resp
ponses suchh as triggerin
ng an alarm or
o a
er to section 6.11.
trip. Forr harmonic prrotection refe

7.11.1 Osc
cillograph
hy
The RC can capture e an oscilloggram of the wwaveform when
w a user specified evvent occurs. The amount of
waveform m captured prior
p to the trigger can be
e configured es from 0 to 80% of the capture prio
d. This range or to
the trigge
er point.
The data
a is saved in n the internal file system or on an extternal USB flash drive annd can be us
sed for analyysis
of powerr quality flucttuations.
The nummber of files which
w can be he internal file system is dependent oon the file size and thus the
e stored in th
capture time. It is baased according to: 1 file at 3s, 3 files
s at 1s and 6 files at 0.55s. An option
n is available
e to
overwrite
e the files or write once.
There is a limit of 500 files per da
ay which can o the USB flash drive.
n be stored on
The sign
nals recorde
ed are the 6 bushing vo oltages, 3 ph
hase currentts and the nneutral curre
ent. The data
a is
recorded
d at a sample
e rate of 1600 samples p
per second.

OSM U
User Man
nual Mo
onitoring
g 109
NOJA
A-5002-08

Oscillogrraphy Logs
• T
The RC file system
s uses IEEE Std C 37.111-1999 9 Comtrade binary
b formatt for Oscillog
graphy capture.
• T
The log files will contain the following
g:
o relayy serial numb ber providingg a unique identifier
o station text “NOJ JA-RC serial--number”
o date e and time the data was ccaptured. 
Panel Na
avigation Power Qu
uality Sett
tings

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] ►Osc◄ Hrm
H Interr
ruptions Sags/Swells
S s
Ø
Oscillo
ography Enable
[MAIN M
MENU] Event Trip
ª [System Settings]
S Capture
e Time (s) 0.5
Capture
e prior to event (%) 50
ª [P
Power Qualitty Settings] Overwrite Capturee Disable
[Osc] ⇒ Save to
o USB Disable

Oscillogrraphy Config
guration Settings

Title Designation
D Range Reso
olution Factory
F Defau
ult
Oscillog
graphy Mon Enable/D
Disable N/A Enable
E
Event Even
nt Pickup/T
Trip/Close/ N/A Trip
T
Alarm/Lo
ogic/IO Inputs//
Prot Ope
eration
e Size (s)1
Capture Captture T,s 0.5/1/3 N/A 0.5
0
Capture
e Prior to Even
nt (%) Captture % 0/5/10/20
0/40/50/60/80 N/A 50
5
Overwritte Capture 2 Overrwrite Enable/D
Disable N/A Disable
D
3
Save to USB USB Save Enable/D
Disable N/A Disable
D
Note:
1. Time required d to save the collected data a to an external USB can be e up to 75% oof the capture size e.g. for a 3s
capture it maay take 2.25s to
t save to USB B. If a triggeriing event occu
urs during thiss time it may not be captured
d.
2. If enabled ovverwrites the existing files, o
otherwise writees once only.
3. If “Save to USSB” is enabledd and a USB fflash drive is notn available, data
d will be saaved to interna
al memory.

7.11.2
2 Harm
monics
The RC controller mmeasures THD, TDD, Ha rmonic Curreent (HRM_I) and Harmoonic Voltage (HRM_V) up p to
the 15th harmonic. The
T signals are
a the 3 bus hing voltages (Ua, Ub, Uc),
U 3 currentts and the ne
eutral currentt.
 
The mea
asured value
es are:
• Fundamenta al frequency in rms (Ia, Ib
b, Ic, In, Ua, Ub,
U Uc)
• Frequency harmonics
h 2 to
t 15 (Ia, Ib, Ic, In, Ua, Ub, Uc)
• TTotal Harmoonic Distortion
n (THD) (Ua , Ub, Uc)
• TTotal Demannd Distortion (TDD) (Ia, Ibb, Ic, In)
 
The harm
monic data collected
c is averaged ove
er 64 cycles and
a made av
vailable everyy 32 cycles.
Harmoniic Logs
• TThe RC file system
s uses IEEE P1159 9.3 PQDIF fo ormat for harrmonic data.
• AAn independ dent deadba and value an nd time can be configure ed for each of THD, TD DD, HRM_I anda
HRM_V whicch allows the e capture of h
harmonic data.
• A single timeer setting forr all deadban
nds is availa
able such tha at when the harmonic ex xceeds the user
u
sset deadbannd for the use eriod, the value at the end of that timee period will be logged.
er set time pe

110 Monitorin
M ng OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

• T
The log will capture all of
o the set val ues associatted with a de eadband valuue and the time it occurrred.
For example e if the HRM__I deadband value is exc ceeded on th he 3rd harmoonic of Ib then the valuess for
Ib 1 to 15 will be saved into the log w
with an indica
ation that it was
w the 3rd hharmonic tha at exceeded the
HRM_I dead dband value.
• Limited to a maximum off 1000 record ds.

Panel Na
avigation
Power Q
Quality Set
ttings
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Osc ►Hrm◄
► Inte
erruptions Sags/Swel
lls
Ø
[MAIN M
MENU] Log Harmonics Enable
THD Enable
ª [System Settings]
S THD Dea
adband (%) 5.0
TDD Enable
ª [P
Power Quality
y Settings] TDD Dea
adband (%) 5.0
HRM_I Enable
[Hrm] ⇒  HRM_I Deadband
D (%%) 5.0
HRM_V Enable
 HRM_V Deadband
D (%%) 5.0
Time (s
s) 10

Harmoniics Settings

T
Title Des
signation Range Resol ution Factory
F Defau
ult
Log Harm
monics HRM Log Enable
e/Disable N/A Enable
THD THD Enable
e Enable
e/Disable N/A Enable
THD Dea
adband THD % 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 5.0
0
TDD TDD Enable
e Enable
e/Disable N/A Enable
TDD Dea
adband TDD % 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 5.0
0
HRM_I HRM_I Enable
e/Disable N/A Enable
HRM_I Deadband HRM_I % 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 5.0
0
HRM_V HRM_V Enable
e/Disable N/A Enable
HRM_V D
Deadband HRM_V % 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 5.0
0
Time (s) T, s 1.0 to 120.0 0.1 10
Note:
• THD: Total Ha
armonic Distorrtion is defined
d as the THD = square roott (sum (V2 to V 15))/V1
• TDD: Total Demand
D Disto
ortion is defin
ned as the TD DD = square root (sum (II22 to I15))/IL (W
Weekly) wherre IL
(Weekly) is the maximum rm
ms demand cu urrent over the
e week.

7.11.3
3 Long and Sh
hort Dura
ation Inte
erruption
ns
The long g and short duration intterruption infformation co
ollected can be used to calculate System
S Avera
age
Interrupttion Duration
n Index (SAIDI), System Average Intterruption Frrequency Inddex (SAIFI) and
a Momenttary
Average e Interruption Frequency Index (MAIF I).

An interrruption startss when all 3 phase volta


ages fall beloow the Loss of Supply Deetection (LSD) voltage. The
T
interrupttion ends when one phas se voltage is equal to or greater
g than the LSD volttage.

The RC allows the useru to set a duration to determine th e between a short and lo
he difference ong interruptiion,
and can log all the innformation re elevant to eaach of these interruptions separately. If the duratio
on time is se
et to
zero it w
will capture all interruption
ns as Long DDuration Interrruptions.

The dura ation time is the minimum SD to be true (no voltage


m time for LS e on terminaals) to be cou
unted as a lo
ong
interrupttion. It is also
a used as the minimmum reset tiime for restored voltagee before an n interruption
n is
considerred finished.

OSM U
User Man
nual Mo
onitoring
g 111
NOJA
A-5002-08

If, after vvoltage has been restore ed, LSD tran


nsitions to tru
ue, before th he minimum reset time has
h expired, the
interrupttion time will continue to accumulate
a a
and the rese et timer will re
eset.
Interrupttion Logs
• T
The RC file system
s uses IEEE P1159 9.3 PQDIF fo ormat for long and short dduration interruptions.
• T
The log conttains: 
o the U(a,b,c)
U or U(r,s,t)
U
o the duration
d (LSDD true to LSD
D false)
o the start
s and finis
sh times
o each n on either si de of the Re
h interruption ecloser
o a ma aximum of 2,,000 recordss.

To config
gure the Inte
erruption dura
ation and turrn on the logg
ging of the fields, see be low.

Panel Na
avigation Power Qua
ality Settings

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Osc Hrm ►Interrup
ptions◄ Sag
gs/Swells
Ø
Monitor Interruptio
I ons Disabl
le
[MAIN M
MENU] Log Short
t Interrupt
tions Disable
ª [System Settings]
S Duration (s) 60

ª [P
Power Qualitty Settings]
ptions] ⇒
[Interrup

Interrupttions Configu
uration Settin
ngs

Title Designa
ation Range Reesolution Factory Defa
ault
Monitor Interruptions Mon En
nable/Disable N/A Disable
D

Log Shorrt Duration Inte


erruptions Log Short Durration En
nable/Disable N/A Disable
D

Duration (s) Duration T, s 0 to 300 1 60


6

Note: If th
he Duration iss set to zero th
hen all interrup
ptions will be captured
c as long interruptionns.

7.11.4
4 Sags and Sw
wells
The RC records volttage variations occurring
g outside a user
u set period of time. S
Sag and Swell voltages are
based on
n the phase to ground vooltages.

Sags

A voltag
ge Sag occu urs when one or more o of the 3 pha
ase voltages
s fall below the Sag No ormal Thresh
hold
voltage. The Sag ends
e when all
a of the 3 phase volta ages are equ
ual to or greeater than th
he Sag Norm
mal
Threshold voltage plus
p a 2% hy
ysteresis vo
oltage. A neww Sag occurrence can only be gen nerated when a
previouss Sag has en
nded.

If all 3 ph
hase voltagees fall below the Sag Min
n Threshold voltage
v then the Sag withh the duration and minim
mum
voltage w will be generrated immediately.

The lowe
est Sag valu
ue is recorde Reset Time providing it is equal to oor greater than the user set
ed after the R
Sag Tim
me period.

112 Monitorin
M ng OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

The loweest Sag volta


age, the othe
er 2 phase vo
oltages and the time durration is recoorded with the time stamp
p at
the end o
of the Sag Event.
E
Swells

A voltag
ge Swell beg
gins when on ne of more of the 3 phaase voltages
s is above thhe Swell No ormal Thresh
hold
voltage and ends when all of th
he 3 phase vvoltages are equal to orr less than thhe Swell No
ormal Thresh
hold
voltage m
minus a 2% hysteresis vo
oltage.

The high
hest swell vaalue and the e other 2 phaase voltagess at that time uration after the
e is recordedd with the du
Reset Tiime providing
g it is equal to
t or greater than the use
er set Swell Time
T period.

The sweell ends when the voltage returns to Normal +/- 2% hysteres Reset Time. If the voltage
sis, for the R e is
picked u
up again befo
ore the Reset Time expire er configurable.
es the reset timer is reset. The Resett Time is use

Sag/Swe
ell Logs
• T
The RC file system
s uses IEEE P1159 9.3 PQDIF foormat for Sag
g/Swells dataa.
• T
The Sags/Sw wells log con
ntains the folllowing:
o lowe est/highest vooltage along with the other two phasees
o dura ation of each Sag/Swell
o the start
s and finis
sh times of a Sag/Swell on
o either side
e of the Reclloser
o a ma aximum of 2,,000 recordss.

Power Quality Se
ettings
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Osc Hrm Inte
erruptions ►Sags/Swel
lls◄
Ø
Sag Monitoring
M Disabl
le
MAIN ME
ENU] Sag Normal
N Thre
eshold 0.9
90
Sag Min
M Thresho
old 0.1
10
ª [System Settings]
S
Sag Time
T (ms) 2
20
ª [P
Power Qualitty Settings] Swell Monitorinng Disabl
le
Swell Normal Thhreshold 1.1
10
Swells] ⇒
[Sags/S
Swell Time (ms)) 2
20
Reset
t Time (ms)) 5
50
wells Configu
Sags/Sw uration Settin
ngs
Title Designation
n Range Reso
olution Factory
F Defau
ult
Sag Moniitoring Mon Enable/Disab
E ble N/A Dis
sable
Sag Normmal Threshold Normaal pu 0.50
0 to 0.90 0.01 0.9
90
Sag Min TThreshold Min pu
u 0.10
0 to 0.50 0.01 0.1
10
Sag Timee (ms) T, ms 10
1 to 1000 1 20
Swell Monitoring Mon Enable/Disab
E ble N/A Dis
sable
Swell Norrmal Thresho
old Normaal pu 1.01
1 to 1.80 0.01 1.1
10
Swell Tim
me (ms) T, ms 10
1 to 1000 1 20
Reset Tim
me (ms) Sag/Swwell Reset T ime, ms 0 to 1000 1 50

Note: Th
he threshold value
v is spec
cified as a pe
er unit value of the system
m phase to gground voltag
ge (U_rated//√3)

7.11.5
5 Resetting da
ata recorrds and counters
c s
“RESET DATA” on th
he Main Men
nu or CMS alllows resettin
ng of Power Quality reco rds and coun
nters.

OSM U
User Man
nual Mo
onitoring
g 113
NOJA
A-5002-08

7.11.6
6 Saviing Powe
er Qualitty Data to
o USB
Power Q
Quality data captured
c by the
t RC can b
be saved ma
anually to a USB
U flash drivve.
Go to thhe Power Qu uality Status
s screen and d insert a US
SB flash driv
ve into a poort on the reelay. The opttion
“Transfeer Internal Ca
aptures to USSB” will be d
displayed. Select
S this op
ption and preess enter to save the pow
wer
quality data to USB.
Please nnote that for all logs exc
cept for oscilllography file
es the RC re
etains a copyy of the logs
s in the interrnal
flash me
emory. For oscillograph hy files thoug
gh, the RC deletes
d them
m from the innternal flash
h memory, after
a
confirmin
ng a successsful transfer.
Note:
• PPower qualityy data is saved
d automaticalllly to internal flash
f memoryy although limiited oscillogra
aphy captures (up
tto 6) can be stored to intternal memoryy. If more os scillography ca
aptures are re
required it is recommended d to
aautomatically save the osccillography file
es to USB by enabling the “Save to USB B” option in thhe Power Quaality
SSystem Settinngs menu (refeer to section 7
7.11.1 Oscilloggraphy).

Panel Na
avigation
nel ON] ⇒ [SY
[Turn Pan TUS] ⇒ [Pres
YSTEM STAT ss ESC] Power Qual
lity

Ø <OSC> HR
RM Interru
uptions Sag
gs/Swells
[MAIN M
MENU]
Save To USB Disabled
ª [Syste
em Status] Number of
o Internal
l Captures 4
ª [Power Quality]
Q
[Oscc] ⇒ Insert a USB drive ⇒
►Transfer
r Internal Captures to
t USB►

Power Qua
ality

>OSC< HRM
H Interr
ruptions Sa
ags/Swells

Save To USB Enabled


Number of
o Internal
l Captures 0

>Trans
sfer Interrnal Captu
ures to
USB< (In
( Progres
ss)

114 Monitorin
M ng OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-08

8 Control and Indication


Recloser Control and Indication capabilities are handled by four independent Control and Indication
Elements:
• Operator Panel
• Personal Computer with CMS software installed
• Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA)
• Digital Input and Output (I/O).

Control Capabilities
Control Data Panel CMS SCADA I/O Logic
Date 9 9 9 - -
Time 9 9 9 - -
Settings System Settings Switchgear Calibration 9 9 - - -
Switchgear Configuration 9 9 - - -
Measurement Settings 9 9 - - -
I/O Settings 9 9 - - -
UPS Settings 9 9 - - -
Protocol Settings 9 9 - - -
Port Settings 9 9 - - -
RTC Settings 9 9 - - -
HMI Settings 9 9 - - -
Comms Log Settings 9 9 - - -
Power Quality Settings 9 9 - - -
Fault Flags 9 9 - - -
Group 1-4 Settings 9 9 - - -
Control Signals Remote On/Off 9 9 - - 9
Trip/Close 9 9 9 9 9
On(Prot)/Off(Prot) 9 9 9 9 9
1 Group On (of 4) 9 9 9 9 9
On(DFT)/Off(DFT) 9 9 9 9 9
On(SSM)/Off(SSM) 9 9 9 9 9
On(MNT)/Off(MNT) 9 9 9 9 9
On(HLT)/Off(HLT) 9 9 9 9 9
On(Link HLT to LL)/Off(Link HLT to LL) 9 9 - - -
On(EXT)/Off(EXT) 9 9 9 9 9
On(AR)/Off(AR) 9 9 9 9 9
On(NPS)/Off(NPS) 9 9 9 9 9
On(EF)/Off(EF) 9 9 9 9 9
On(SEF)/Off(SEF) 9 9 9 9 9
On(LL)/Off(LL) 9 9 9 9 9
On(CLP)/Off(CLP) 9 9 9 9 9
On(UV)/Off(UV) 9 9 9 9 9
On(UV4 SAG)/Off(UV4 SAG) 9 9 9 9 9
On(OV)/Off(OV) 9 9 9 9 9
On(OV3)/Off(OV3) 9 9 9 9 9
On(Yn)/Off(Yn) 9 9 9 9 9
On(UF)/Off(UF) 9 9 9 9 9
On(OF)/Off(OF) 9 9 9 9 9
On(ABR)/Off(ABR) 9 9 9 9 9
Reset Fault Counters 9 9 9 - -

OSM User Manual Control and Indication 115


NOJA-5002-08

Control Data Panel CMS SCADA I/O Logic


Control Signals Reset SCADA Counters 9 9 9 9 9
Reset HLT 9 - - - 9
Reset DNP3-SA Counters 9 9 9 9 9
79-2 Trips to Lockout 9 9 9 9 9
79-3 Trips to Lockout 9 9 9 9 9
Test Mode Start 9 9 9 9 9
Reset Binary Fault Targets 9 9 9 9 9
Reset Trip and Max Measured Values - 9 9 9 9
1 VAR On (of 16) - - 9 9 9
1 IO1 Output On (of 8) 9 - 9 9 9
On(Logical Block Close)/Off(Logical 9 9 9 9 9
Block Close)
On(ACO)/Off(ACO) 9 9 9 9 9
On(HRM)/Off(HRM) 9 9 9 9 9
On(Alarm Mode)/Off(Alarm Mode) 9 9 9 9 9
On(LLB)/Off(LLB) 9 9 9 9 9
On(Block P(EF-))/Off(Block P(EF-)) - - 9 9 9
On(Block P(EF+))/Off(Block P(EF+)) - - 9 9 9
On(Block P(SEF-))/Off(Block P(SEF-)) - - 9 9 9
On(Block P(SEF+))/Off(Block P(SEF+)) - - 9 9 9
On(Block P(OV3))/Off(Block P(OV3)) - - 9 9 9

Indication Capabilities
Indication Data Panel CMS SCADA I/O Logic
System Status Date, Time 9 9 9 - -
Measured Data 9 9 9 - -
UPS Status 9 9 9 - -
Indication Signals Local Mode 9 9 9 9 9
Lockout 9 9 9 9 9
AR Initiated - - 9 9 9
Prot Initiated 9 9 9 9 9
Pickup Signals - - 9 9 9
Alarm Signals - - 9 9 9
Open/Closed Signals - - 9 9 9
ACO Messages - - 9 - -
Prot Status Signals 9 9 9 9 9
Malfunctions 9 9 9 9 9
Warnings 9 9 9 9 9
Counter Readings Lifetime Counters 9 9 9 - -
Fault Counters 9 9 9 - -
SCADA Counters 9 9 9 - -
DNP3-SA Counters 9 9 9 - -
GOOSE Counters 9 9 9 - -
Records Close/Open Operations - 9 - - -
Fault Profile 9 9 - - -
Event Log - 9 - - -
Change Log - 9 - - -
Load Profile 9 9 - - -
Refer to:
• Section 5 for details on Measured Data
• Section 11.6 for details of Indication Signals

116 Control and Indication OSM User Manual


NOJA-5002-08

• Section 6.12 for details on Protection Status Control


• Appendix I – Control and Indication of Settings for further information regarding Group settings.

8.1 Operator Panel Settings


The Operator Panel has a number of push buttons (PB) which are configured as fast keys. The panel can
be supplied with one of six different fast key configurations (option 1-6).

Option 1 is displayed below.

PB 1 PB 4

PB 2 PB 5

PB 3 PB 6

Key Configuration Options

Option PB 1 PB 2 PB 3 PB 4 PB 5 PB 6
1 PROT EF SEF AR CLP LL
2 PROT EF ABR AR UV LL
3 PROT EF SEF AR ACO LL
4 PROT EF SEF AR UV LL
51 PROT GF HLT A B C
62 PROT EF SEF AR VAR1 VAR2
Notes:
1. For Single Triple switchgear only.
2. VAR1 and VAR2 are variable fast keys which can be configured by the user via logic and SGA.

Although the panel is supplied with one fast key configuration option, the user can change to another option
through CMS. If a change is made the labels on the panel need to be changed accordingly.

The operator can enable/disable the fast keys within the configuration, through system settings on the
operator panel or CMS. In the panel navigation example below, the operator can make changes to each of
the fast keys in “Key Configuration Option 1”.

HMI SETTINGS
Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC] Fast Keys Control:

Ø
Key Configuration Option 1
[MAIN MENU]
Protection On/Off Enabled
ª [System Settings]
Earth Fault On/Off Enabled
ª [HMI Settings] ⇒ Sensitive Earth Fault On/Off Enabled
Auto-Reclose On/Off Enabled
Cold Load On/Off Enabled
Live Line On/Off Enabled
Active Group Selection Enabled
Delayed Close Disabled
Close Delay (s) 30

OSM User Manual Control and Indication 117


NOJA
A-5002-08

HMI setttings
Title Designattion Settiings Factory
Default
Protecction Fast Keyy Mode Protecction On/Off Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
EF Fast Key mode Earth Fault On/Off Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
SEF F
Fast Key mode
e Sensi tive Earth Fau
ult On/Off Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
AR Fa
ast Key mode Auto-R
Reclose On/O
Off Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
CLP F
Fast Key mode
e Cold L
Load On/Off mode
m Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
LL Fasst Key mode Live L
Line On/Off Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
GRP F
Fast Key mode
e Active
e Group Selec
ction On/Off Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
VAR1 Fast Key mod
de VAR1 On/Off Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
VAR2 Fast Key mod
de VAR2
2 On/Off Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
Delaye
ed Close Delayyed Close Enabled/D isabled Disabled
D
Delaye
ed Close Dela
ay Time Close
e Delay (s) 0-300 secoonds 30
3
ABR F
Fast Key mode
e Autom
matic Backfeed
d Restoration Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
On/Offf mode
ACO F
Fast Key mode
e Auto C
Change Over On/Off mode Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E
Underr Voltage Fast Key mode Underr Voltage On/O
Off mode Enabled/D isabled Enabled
E

Note:
• Only those ke
eys which are in
i the fast keyy configuration
n chosen will be
b available.
• VAR1 and VA AR2 are variab
ble fast keys w
which can be configured
c by the
t user via loogic.

8.1.1 Enabling and Disabl ing Fastt Keys


The pan nel Fast Keyys can be programmed
p to be enab bled or disab bled by the operator, th hrough systeems
nce with local operating p
settings, in accordan practice. If a fast
f key is disabled, pushhing it will ha
ave no effect.

8.1.2 Dela
ayed Close
This featture inserts a delay before closing th
he Recloser when
w the “Close” button is pressed on
o the Opera ator
Panel (o
or PC initiatedd, using CMSS). The delayy can be sett from 0 – 300 seconds. TThis allows an
a operator tiime
to move away from the Recloser before the cclose operatio on occurs.
A messa age is displa
ayed on the LCD Panel when the Close
C button is pushed aand the Closed LED sta
arts
blinking.
g the ESC ke
Pressing ey will cance
el the close o
operation oth
herwise the device
d will cloose after the
e time delay has
h
expired.

8.1.3 Facttory Setttings


The Facctory Settingss menu can be accessed d under USBB operations on the paneel. Insert a USB
U flash drrive
into one of the three
e Relay USB ports. After a few seconnds “USB Opperations” w
will appear as
s a last entryy on
the Mainn Menu. USB B Operations
s and Factorry Settings are password
d protected. P
Please conta act NOJA if you
y
don’t havve the passw
word(s).

Panel Na
avigation FACTORY
Y SETTINGS

nel ON] ⇒ [SY


[Turn Pan TUS] ⇒ [Presss ESC] ⇒
YSTEM STAT Factory Se
ettings ►Disable
ed◄
Ø
Lifetime Counters
C
[MAIN M
MENU] Recovery Options
O
ª [USB Ope
erations] Identifica
ation
ª [F
Factory Settin
ngs] Switchgear
r Settings
HMI Settin
ngs
Install fr
rom USB
Logic CH 17-32
1 Writee Protect

118 Control and Indiication OSM Us


ser Manua
al
NOJA-5002-008

8.2 CM
MS Conttrol and
d Indication
The CMMS Software can be use ed to provide
e control andd indication functions viaa an external PC. Settin
ngs
configure
ed from CMS
S can be dow
wnloaded to tthe device.
For indiccation data, control sign
nals and ap pplicable setttings refer to
t the descrription of ea ach control and
a
indication element in
n this manua al. Activation
n of control signals
s and settings
s via C
CMS is poss sible only whhen
the control mode on the RC is set to local. In ndication via
a CMS is pos ssible in bothh Local and Remote con ntrol
modes.

8.3 SC
CADA Control a
and Indication
The RC C supports a number off SCADA prrotocols whic ch can be used
u to provvide control and indicattion
functionss. Only one SCADA prottocol can be enabled at any
a one time
e.
Indicatio
on via SCADA A is possible
e in both Loccal and Rem
mote control modes.
m Devicces connected to a SCA
ADA
port can be set to run
n as a Local or Remote u user.
SCADA functionality is determine plicable com
ed by the app o NOJA-565 RC
mmunications protocol. Pleease refer to
SCADA Interface Description and the relevvant protoco ol document such as NO OJA-522 RC C DNP3 Devvice
Profile, N
NOJA-5604 RC IEC60870-5-101 an nd 104 Protoocol Implementation, NOOJA-560 RC C 2179 Proto
ocol
Impleme entation and NOJA 5017 RC Logical NNodes Definition.

8.3.1 DNP
P3 Settings
The setttings listed below are available
a fro m the Pane
el menu system. Additioonal advance ed settings are
available
e from CMS only. Pleasee refer to the
e CMS Helpp File and DN
NP3 Device Profile for fu
ull point list and
a
more details.
Panel Na
avigation DNP
P3 SETTINGS
S
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Ø DNP3 Disable
ed
[MAIN M
MENU] SCADA Time
T Loca
al
Slave Address
A 5
ª [System Settings]
S Master Address 10
03
ª [P
Protocol Setttings] Unsolic
cited Disable
ed
Port RS23
32
ª [DNP3] ⇒ Connect
tion Type Se
erial Direc
ct
Check Master
M IP N
No
Master IP 0.0.0.
.0
Poll Wa
atchdog Timme(min) 0
Binary Control Waatchdog Tim
me(min) 0
Protocol Settings

Title De
esignation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
DNP3 DNP3 Disabled
d / Enabled NA Disa
abled
SCADA Time SCADA Time Local/ [G
GMT/UTC] NA GMT
T/UTC
Slave Ad
ddress Slave ad
ddr 0 - 65519 1 5
Master A
Address Master addr
a 0 - 65534
4 1 3
Unsolicited Unsolicitted Disabled
d / Enabled NA Disa
abled
Port Port type
e RS232/U
USBA/USBB/U USBC NA RS2
232
(2
2)
/LAN/RS
S232P//None
(3)
Connecttion Type Connecttion Type Serial Direct/Disabled// NA Seria
al Direct
Serial Mo
odem/Serial
Radio/LAAN/WLAN
Check M
Master IP Check Master
M IP Yes/No NA No

OSM User Ma
anual Control
C and
a Indic
cation 119
NOJA
A-5002-08

Title De
esignation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Master IIP Master IP NA NA 0.0.0
0.0
Poll Wattchdog Time Poll Wattchdog 0-1440 min
m 1 minn 0
Time(min)
Binary C
Control Binary Control
C 0-1440 min
m 1 minn 0
Watchdoog Time Watchdoog Time(min)
Notes:
1. R
RS232P cannnot be used as
s it is used by the operator panel.
p
2. The Connectio
on Type is dep
pendent on th he Port setting
g.
Poll Wattchdog Time is a user se et period of tiime before thhe external supply
s will bee reset, if the
e protocol is not
Whenever prrotocol is polled this time
polled. W er is reset. This
T timer ov
verrides the External Loa ad Reset Tim me.
Set to ze
ero this timerr is de-activa
ated.
Control Watcchdog Time is a user se
Binary C et period of time
t before the externall supply will be reset, if the
ontrol is not activated. Whenever
binary co W nary control point is moddified this timer is reset. This
an allocated bin T
timer ove
errides the External
E Loadd Reset Time
e. Set to zero
o this timer is
s de-activateed.

DNP3 Se
ecure Authe
entication
The RC supports DN
NP3 Secure Authenticatio
A on (DNP3-SA
A) version 2 (SAv2)
( and vversion 5 (SA
Av5).
CMS can n be used to o generate th he DNP3-SA Update Key y file. The file
e can be uplloaded to the
e RC by placcing
it in the “\rc10\Updates” folder on o a USB flaash drive, plu
ugging it into
o a USB porrt on the relaay module thhen
installing
g it from the factory
f settin
ngs screen ass shown belo
ow.
Please rrefer to NOJA
A- 559 CMS Help File an
nd NOJA-522
2 RC10 DNP3 Device Proofile for more
e details.

Panel Na
avigation
FACTORY
Y SETTINGS
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Ø Factory Settings Disabled
Lifetime
e Counters
Insert US
SB Flash Driive Recovery
y Options
(Wait a ffew seconds) Identification
Switchge
ear Calibraation
[MAIN M
MENU] HMI Sett
tings
ª [USB Ope
erations] Install Firmware ffrom USB
►Install DNP3-SA Uppdate Key◄
<Entter Password
d 1> Logic CH
H 17-32 Wriite Protect
t Disabled
d
ª [Facto
ory Settings]]
<Enter Passsword 2>
ª [Innstall DNP3--SA Update Key]
K ⇒
Note:
• The update fo
older on the USSB Flash drivee must only co
ontain the DNPP3-SA Updatee Key file
• P
Please contacct NOJA Supp port if you requ
uire passwords
s
• C
Can only insta
all the DNP3-S
SA Update keyy if the system
m is in local mo
ode.
To view the status off DNP3-SA via
v the panel go to System
m Status -> Protocols
P - > DNP3.

8.3.2 IEC 60870-5--101/104


4 Settings
s
The setttings listed below are available
a fro m the Pane
el menu system. Additioonal advance
ed settings are
available
e from CMS S only. Pleaase refer to the CMS Help H File an
nd IEC608770-5-101 andd 104 Protoocol
Impleme entation docu
ument for fulll point list an
nd more details.

120 Control and Indiication OSM Us


ser Manua
al
NOJA-5002-008

IEC 60870 SETT


TINGS
Panel Na
avigation
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
IEC 60870-5-101/ 104 Disabled
Ø SCADA Time
T GMT/U
UTC
[MAIN M
MENU] Data Link Addres s 5
Common Address o f ASDU 5
ª [System Settings]
S
Port RS2
232
ª [P
Protocol Setttings] Connection Type Serial
S Dire
ect
Check Master
M IP No
ª [IEC 608770] ⇒
Master IP 0.0.0
0.0
Poll Watchdog Timme (min) 0
Binary Control WWatchdog Time (min) 0
60870 P
Protocol Settings
Title Designatio n Range Ressolution Factory Default
IEC 6087
70-5-101/104 Proto
ocol Enable Dis
sabled / Enable
ed NA Disabled
D
SCADA T
Time Time
e GM
MT/UTC/Local NA GMT/UTC
G
Data Linkk Address Data
a Link Addresss 1-5
5 1 5
1
Common
n Address of ASDU
A Common Address of 1 – 254 or 1-65534 1 0
ASDU
Port Port USBA/USBB/USBC/ NA None
N
N/None2
LAN
Connectiion Type Conn
nection Type Serrial NA Serial
S Direct
Dire
ect/Disabled/
Serrial Modem/Se erial
Raddio/LAN/WLAN
Check Master IP Chec
ck Master IP Yes
s/No NA No
N
Master IP
P Mastter IP NA
A NA NA
N
Poll Watcchdog Time (m
min) Poll Watchdog
W Tim
me, min 0-1440 1 minn 60
6
Binary Co
ontrol Watchd
dog Binary Control Wa
atchdog 0-1440 1 minn 60
6
Time (min) e, min
Time
Notes:
1. F
For IEC 60870
0-101 range is
s 1-254. For IIEC 60870-10
04 range is 1-6
65534.
2. The Connectiion Type is dependent
d on the Port settiing. RS232P is used for co
communication
n by the operrator
p
panel.

8.3.3 IEC
C 61850 Settings
S
NOJA’s implementattion of the IEC 61850 pro
otocol provide
es the follow
wing:
• Manufacturin ng Message Specification n (MMS)
• G Generic Obje
ect Oriented Substation EEvents (GOO OSE) Publish her and GOO
OSE Subscriber.
MMS funnctionality ca
an be used for
f monitorin ol (SCADA functions) annd GOOSE functionality can
ng and contro c
be used for peer-to peer
p co-ordin
nation.
For more
e details refe
er to NOJA-5
5005 IEC 618 850 IED Defiinition and Conformance Statement and
a NOJA-50
017
IEC 6185
50 RC10 Log gical Nodes Definition.
Panel Na
avigation IEC 61
1850 SETTIN
NGS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] <General> MM
MS GOOS
SE
Ø
IED name RC10
0
[MAIN M
MENU] Monitor GOOSE
G Sim F
Flag <Enabled>
>
ª [System Settings]
S Process Simulated
S G
GOOSE <Disabled>
>
Quality Test
T Bit Ha
andling <Enabled>
>
ª [P
Protocol Setttings]
ª [IEC 618550] ⇒

OSM User Ma
anual Control
C and
a Indic
cation 121
NOJA
A-5002-08

61850 P
Protocol Settings
Title Designatio n Range Ressolution Factory Default
General
IED Nam
me IED Name Up to 20 characters NA
Monitor G
GOOSE Sim Flag
F Mon GOOSE SimF
Flag Ena
abled/Disabled
d NA Enabled
E
Process Simulated GO
OOSE ProcSimGOOSE Ena
abled/Disabled
d NA Disabled
D
Quality T
Test Bit Handling QualTestHandling Ena
abled/Disabled
d NA Enabled
E
MMS
MMS Server MMS
S Server Ena
abled/Disabled
d NA Disabled
D
Port MMS
S Port USBA/USBB/USBC/ NA None
N
N/None1
LAN
Connectiion Type1 Conn
nection Type Serrial NA Serial
S Direct
Dire
ect/Disabled/
Serrial Modem/Se erial
Raddio/LAN/WLAN
GOOSE
GOOSE Publisher GOO
OSE Publisherr Ena
abled/Disabled
d NA Disabled
D
GOOSE Subscriber GOO
OSE Subscribe
er Ena
abled/Disabled
d NA Disabled
D
Port GOO
OSE Port
Connectiion Type Conn
nection Type Serrial NA Serial
S Direct
Dire
ect/Disabled/
Serrial Modem/Se erial
Raddio/LAN/WLAN
Note: The
e Connection Type is depen
ndent on the p
port setting an
nd the relay moodule version..

8.3.4 2179
9 Setting
gs
Panel Na
avigation 2179 SETTINGS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC]
Ø 2179 Disable
ed
Slave Address
A 1
[MAIN M
MENU]
Master Address 0
ª [System Settings]
S Port RS23
32
SBO Tim
meout 5
ª [P
Protocol Setttings]
ª [2179] ⇒
2179 Pro
otocol Settings

Title De
esignation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
2179 2179 Disabled
d / Enabled NA Disa
abled
1
Slave Ad
ddress Slave ad
ddress 1 – 2046
6 1 1
Master A
Address Master address
a 0 - 31 1 0
Port Port RS232/U
USBA/USBB/U
USBC NA RS2
232
RS232P/None2
meout (s)3
SBO Tim SBO Tim
meout 1-3600 1 5
Notes:
1. AAddress 2047 7 is reserved fo
or broadcastin
ng.
2. LLAN is not avvailable as a configurable
c po
ort as the 21779 protocol is for serial com
mmunication ne etworks. RS23
32P
iis used for com
mmunication byb the operatoor panel.
3. SSelect Before Operate (SBO O) is the amou ommand is recceived before which an operate
unt of time aftter a select co
ccommand mu ust be received
d.

122 Control and Indiication OSM Us


ser Manua
al
NOJA-5002-008

8.3.5 Com
mmunication Portt Status
The setttings and sta
atus of a communicationn port can beb viewed through the P Panel under System Stattus.
The example below is for an RS2 232 port. Re
efer to sectio
ons 0 and 4.7
7.4 for comm
munication po
ort configurattion
details.
RS2 32 STATUS
anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM
[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS]
ª [Comm
munications Ports]
Detecte
ed Type Serial
Ø Configu
ured Type Serial Direct
Device Mode Remote
NICATIONS PORT
[COMMUN P STAT
TUS]
32]⇒
ª [RS23 Serial Pins:
DTR: Hi
igh DSR
R: Low CD: Ignore
RTS: Hi
igh S: Ignore RI: Low
CTS

Connect
tion State : Disconnected
Bytes Received:
R 123456
Bytes Transmitted
T d: 3456
Test O
Off
Hangup

Serial Po
ort Status

Item Descriptio
on Ran
nge
Configured Type Configured
d Type Disaabled/Serial
Direect/Modem/Ra adio//GPRS
Device MMode Local or Re
emote Device Loccal/Remote
Serial Pins(1) RS232 Porrt Serial Pins Hig h/Low/Ignore
DTR, RT TS, CD,
DSR, CT TS, RI
Connecttion State Displays po
ort connection
n status Discconnected/Coonnected/Dialing
Reddialing/Autodia
aling
Bytes R
Received Displays am
mount of bytess received. Co
ount can be re
eset to 0 - 9999999999
zero by pre
essing enter.
Bytes Trransmitted Displays am mount of bytess transmitted. Count can bee reset 0 - 9999999999
to zero by pressing
p enterr.
Test2 Sends ASC CII string “NOOJA” out through the RS232 port Off//On
(radio and serial direct)). Message continues
c for 30s or
until turned
d off.
NA Hangup (m modem only) d due to inactive
e timeout or re
eceived Hanngup
“NO CARR RIER” string ffrom DCE or the DCD sign nal has
changed from high to low w.
Notes:
• D
DTR=Data Te erminal Ready y, RTS=Requ uest to Send, DSR=Data Set Ready, CT TS=Clear to Send,
S CD=Carrrier
D
Detect, RI=Rinng Indicator
• The Test strin
ng can also be seen through
h a USB port iff using a USB to RS232 adaaptor.

For mod dems, there is an additio onal setting in CMS, “Mo odem is pow wered from eexternal loadd”. This is ussed
when the e communications protoc col is running
g. When thiss setting is On
O and the E External Loadd is Off, the RC
will not try and use th
he communic cation devicee. Please reffer to the SCADA Interfacce Descriptio
on documentt for
a detaileed description
n of this featu
ure.

OSM User Ma
anual Control
C and
a Indic
cation 123
NOJA
A-5002-08

8.4 Inp
puts and
d Outpu
uts (I/O))
The RC controller fuunctionality can
c be extennded by usin
ng the three local digital inputs on th
he relay mod
dule
and two optional Inpu
ut/Output (I/O
O) Modules.

For more ease refer to NOJA 5591 RC Relay IO


e details, ple O and Logic User
U Guide.

8.4.1 I/O Control


C
The Relaay Module lo
ocal inputs (IN1, IN2 and ed to assert the
d IN3) are dry connections. No voltaage is require
input. Each I/O mod
dule has eighht voltage acttivated inputs
s and eight relay outputs .

Inputs
The Inpu
ut Status willl follow the input voltage ge to On whhen the input voltage sig
e signal i.e. it will chang gnal
changess from low to high and it will
w change tto Off when the t input voltage signal cchanges from
m high to loww. A
Recognition Time deelay can be applied
a to elim
minate spurioous controls.
Please n
note that the control pointt is set when
n the Input Sttatus change
es from Off too On.
If an I/O module is se
et to Disable mode, its in
nput control voltages
v are ignored.
The Inpu uts operate as latched commands. Therefore there t is usually an On/O
Off pair of commands.
c For
example e, if you wantt to turn on Sensitive
S Earrth Fault, use
e “SEF On”. If you want tto turn Sensitive Earth Fa
ault
protectio
on Off you neeed to use a separate inp put and assig gn it to “SEF Off”.
Note:
• In order for the Input to operate with
h Recognitio
on Time delay, the settingg “Edge Trig
ggered” mustt be
set to “No”.
Outputs
The outp
puts can be activated
a by assigning acctuating signal, SCADA protocol
p or Loogic.
A Recog gnition Time output. This applies a delay before activating th
e can be sett for each o he output re
elay
contactss.
Reset Tiime delays th
he de-activattion of the re
elay output affter the actua
ating signal iss deactivated
d.
The Outtputs can be configured to operate a as pulsed contacts when they are proogrammed to stay open (or
closed) ffor the speccific time. In this mode off operation, the “Pulse Enable”
E needds to be set to ON and the
Pulse Time must be set.

8.4.2 Enabling I/O


O Module
es
I/O Modu
ules can be fitted
f at the time
t of manu
ufacture or in
nstalled in the
e controller aat a later stag
ge.

When thhe I/O Module


e(s) are first connected t hey are reco
ognised by th
he relay softw
ware and the
e Serial Nummber
and I/O Number are e displayed ono the Inputt/Output settings screen (it may takee about 60 seconds
s for the
moduless to be recog
gnised). If thhe two Modu ules are avaailable then the
t I/O1 or II/O2 designaation can be re-
assigned
d as required
d.
Panel Na
avigation INPUT/OU
UTPUT SETTINGS

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Devic
ce Mode
Ø Local Inputs:
I Local
I/O 1: Local
[MAIN M
MENU] I/O 2: Local
ª [System Settings]
S
I/O Confi
iguration
ª [I//O Settings] ⇒ Serial Number I/O
O Number
0151200
0090407 1
0151200
0090408 2

124 Control and Indiication OSM Us


ser Manua
al
NOJA-5002-08

General settings
Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default
Local Inputs operation mode Local Inputs Local/Remote – Local
I/O1 operation mode1 I/O 1 Local/Remote – Local
1
I/O2 operation mode I/O 2 Local/Remote – Local
I/O Number2 I/O Number 1/2 – N/A
Notes:
1. The Operational Mode for an I/O module can be set to Local or Remote mode and applies to inputs only. This
allows the commands to be executed in the same mode as the RC-10. Selection of operation mode is only
relevant when an I/O Module is connected.
2. To confirm that the correct number is assigned to the I/O module, check the displayed serial number of the I/O
module on the panel and confirm with the label on the I/O module. The flash rate will indicate if this is I/O
module 1 or 2. Module 1 LED will flash once each second, I/O Module 2 will flash twice each second.
For wiring details, refer to section 4.7.1 and 4.7.2.
The I/O modules can be Enabled or Disabled from CMS or the Operator Panel (in CMS go to Online
Operations - > I/O Configuration).

Individual inputs and outputs on the /O Modules can be Enabled or Disabled using CMS only whereas local
Inputs can be Enabled or Disabled through the operator panel as well as CMS. To Enable or Disable
individual inputs or outputs in CMS go to Offline Settings - > I/O.

Individual inputs and outputs can only be configured through CMS.


INPUT/OUTPUT STATUS
Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] Local Inputs: Disable
1 2 3
ª [Input/Output] ⇒
Na Na Na

I/O 1 Module: Disable


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
In: Na Na Na Na Na Na Na Na
Out: Na Na Na Na Na Na Na Na

I/O 2 Module: Disable


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
In: Na Na Na Na Na Na Na Na
Out: Na Na Na Na Na Na Na Na

General settings

Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default


Local Inputs Local Inputs Disable/Enable – Disable
I/O1 Module I/O 1 Module Disable/Enable/Test1/Test2/Test31 – Disable
I/O2 Module I/O 2 Module Disable/Enable/Test1/Test2/Test31 – Disable

Notes:
1. Three Test Modes are available through the operator panel to check the correct I/O Module operation:
• Test1 - Activation of any input activates all eight outputs.
• Test2 - Activation of any input activates its corresponding output.
• Test3 - Activation of any input activates its corresponding output with any assigned parameters (such as
pulse time or recognition time) for the input or output.

OSM User Manual Control and Indication 125


NOJA
A-5002-08

8.4.3 Loca
al Digital Inputs S
Signal Map
M
Input Sig
gnal Map

Inpu
ut Range Facto
ory Default
1 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
2 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
3 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input

Configurrable Settings (applicable


e for each loccal input – co
onfigured thrrough CMS)

Title Designation Range Reso


olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Mode Mode
e Enable/Disable N/A En
nable
Recog
gnition Time Recog
gnition Time, s 0.01 – 1.00s 0.01s 0.0
01

8.4.4 I/O Modules


M Signal M
Map
If the I/O
O Modules arre replaced, the
t Digital M
Mapping is rettained in the Relay Moduule.
Input sig
gnal map

Inpu
ut Range Facto
ory Default
1 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
2 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
3 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
4 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
5 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
6 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
7 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input
8 Any co
ontrol signal + Disable Generic Input

Configurrable Settings (applicable


e for each I/O
O module dig
gital input – configured
c thhrough CMS)))
Title Designation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Mode Mode
e Enable/Disable N/A En
nable
Triggered1
Edge T Edge Triggered Yes/N
No N/A No
o
gnition Time1
Recog Recog
gnition Time, s 0.01 – 2.00s 0.01s 0.0
01

Note: The input sttatus follows the


t input signaal i.e. it will ch
hange to On when
w the inpuut voltage sign
nal changes from
f
low to high and
a it will channge to Off whe
en the input vo oltage signal changes
c from high to low. The
T control siggnal
is activated when the inpuut status chan
nges from Offf to On. In ord der for an Inpuut to operate with a time deelay
(apply Recoognition Time), the Edge Trig
gger must be set to “No”.

Output ssignal map


Outp
put Range Facto
ory Default
1 Any ind
dication signal + disable Generic output
2 Any ind
dication signal + disable Generic output
3 Any ind
dication signal + disable Generic output
4 Any ind
dication signal + disable Generic output
5 Any ind
dication signal + disable Generic output
6 Any ind
dication signal + disable Generic output
7 Any ind
dication signal + disable Generic output
8 Any ind
dication signal + disable Generic output

126 Control and Indiication OSM Us


ser Manua
al
NOJA-5002-08

Configurable settings (applicable for each I/O module digital output - configured through CMS)
Title Designation Range Resolution Factory Default
Mode Mode Enable/Disable N/A Enable
Recognition Time Recognition Time, s 0.01 – 2.00s 0.01s 0.01
Reset Time Reset Time, s 0.00 – 180.00s 0.01s 0.00
Pulse Enable1 Pulse Enable On/Off N/A Off
Pulse Time1 Pulse Time, s 0.02 – 180.00s 0.01s 0.02
Note 1: The outputs can be configured to operate as pulsed contacts when they are programmed to stay open (or
closed) for the specific time. In this mode of operation, the “Pulse Enable” needs to be set to “On” and the
Pulse Time must be set.

8.5 Logic
Logic expressions can be built using CMS software. The expressions employ logic operators such as “or,
nor, xor, and, nand, not and ( )” with other variables such as pickup, open, alarm, closed, status, malfunction
or any general control or indication point.

The Logic Expression is evaluated on change of state of any of its input signals, upon download of logic
settings from CMS and upon startup of the controller.

Recognition and Reset Times are applied to the Logic Expression Output. This will determine the Logic
Status displayed.

The “Set When” mode will be applied to the Logic Status to determine the Expression Output. The output
can then be assigned to SCADA points or the I/O to initiate other actions. For more details, please refer to
NOJA 5591 RC Relay IO and Logic User Guide.

Note: The operation of Logic is independent of the device being in local or remote mode.

The “Set when” mode is set by the user in CMS. Definition of Operation for the “Set When” mode is
described below:
EITHER The Expression Output will be activated when the Logic Status is TRUE and it will be deactivated when the
Logic Status is FALSE.
TRUE The Expression Output will be activated when the Logic Status is TRUE and it will stay in this state.
(Equivalent to turning the Output ON and leaving it in the ON state).
FALSE The Expression Output will be deactivated when the Logic Status is FALSE and it will stay in this state.
(Equivalent to turning the Output OFF and leaving it in the OFF state).

CMS Logic Device Settings


Recognition Time User set time before a change in the Logic Expression Output causes the Logic
Status to change. Recognition time initiation is dependent on the “Set When” mode
selected.
Reset Time User set time before a change in the Logic Expression Output causes the Logic
Status to change. Reset time initiation is dependent on the “Set When” mode
selected.
Pulse time Time the Expression Output remains ON or OFF depending on “set when” condition.
Log Enable Enables a log entry (expression name) to occur for this expression output.

Recognition and Reset Time Initiation


“Set when” Mode Logic Expression Output Change Recognition Time Initiated Reset Time Initiated
Either False to True Yes No
True to False No Yes
True False to True Yes No
True to False No Yes
False False to True No Yes
True to False Yes No

OSM User Manual Control and Indication 127


NOJA
A-5002-08

CMS Co
onfigurable Settings
S (applicable for ea
ach logic outp
put)
Title Designation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Mode Mode
e Enable/Disable N/A En
nable
Recog
gnition Time Recog
gnition Time, s 0.00 – 180.00s 0.01s 0.0
00
Reset Time Resett Time, s 0.00 – 180.00s 0.01s 0.0
00
Pulse Enable Pulse
e Enable On/Off N/A Offf
Pulse Time Pulse
e Time, s 0.02 – 180.00s 0.01s 0.0
02
Log En
nable Log Enable
E On/Off N/A Offf

Panel Na
avigation LOG IC

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ ST
TATUS] ►Logic Status◄ Sm utomation
mart Grid Au
Logic] ⇒
ª [L Logic: D Wri
ite Prot 17-32: D

<CH 1-8> CH 9-16 CH 17-24 CH


C 25-32
1 2 3 4

Disable Disable Disable Disable


Off Off Off Off

5 6 7 8

Disable Disable Disable Disable


Off Off Off Off

General S
Settings
Title Designation
n Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Logic Logic
c Disab
ble/Enable/Tes
st N/A Dis
sable
Prot 17-321,2
Write P Write
e Prot CH 17-3
32 Disab
ble/Enable N/A Dis
sable

Note:
1. The field Wriite Prot 17-322 indicates whhether the log
gic channels 17-32 are wririte protected. By default write
w
p
protection of channels
c 17-3
32 is disabled.
2. The field Write
e Prot 17-32 can
c be change ed through thee factory settin
ngs menu or inn CMS.

8.5.1 Smart Grid Automattion


NOJA Po ower’s Smarrt Grid Autom mation (SGA)) enables customers to immplement annd deploy dis
stributed con
ntrol
and auttomation applications on the RC recloser in accordance e with the IIEC 61499 standard. The T
functiona
ality includess PC software tools and e
embedded sooftware for th
he RC reclosser.

Panel Na
avigation LOG
GIC

anel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM


[Turn Pa [ TATUS] ⇒ [P
ST [Press ESC] Logic Status ►Sm art Grid Aut
tomation◄

Ø
[MAIN M
MENU] Smart Grid Autommation Enabl
led
ª [System Status]
S TCP Port Number 614
499
Command
ª [L
Logic] Send SGA WARM EEvent Initia
ate
mation] ⇒
ª [Smarrt Grid Autom Send SGA STOP EEvent Initia
ate
Delet
te FBOOT Initia
ate
Insta
all FBOOT ffrom USB Initia
ate
Status
Avail
lable resouurces 1
Faile
ed resourcees 0
FBOOT
T Status Install
led

128 Control and Indiication OSM Us


ser Manua
al
NOJA-5002-008

Smart G
Grid Automation
Title Designation Range Reso
olution Fa
actory Defaultt
Smart G
Grid Automatio
on SGA Disab
bled / Enabled
d NA Disa
abled
TCP Port Number TCP Port
P Number 1025
5-65535 1 6149
99
1 1
Send SG
GA WARM Evvent Send SGA
S WARM E
Event Initiatte NA Initia
ate
Send SG ent2
GA STOP Eve Send SGA
S STOP Evvent2 Initiatte NA Initia
ate
Delete F
FBOOT Delete
e FBOOT Initiatte NA Initia
ate
U 3
Install FBOOT from USB Install FBOOT from USB Initiatte NA Initia
ate
Notes:
1. A WARM Eve ent will be sentt to the Smart Grid Applicatiion.
2. A STOP even nt will be sent to
t the Smart GGrid Applicatioon.
3. When a file is installed from
m USB, the file
e is copied to non-volatile
n me
emory on the relay.
SGA Sta
atus
Stattus Description Commeent
Available Disp plays the num mber of availab
ble Resources are loadedd into the runntime from thee sga.fboot file
e or
es
resource resoources on the RC. downloaded to the rela
ay via the SGAA application.
Failed Disp plays number of resource es
resource
es thatt have failed to load into th he
runttime.
FBOOT Status Disp plays whethe er the FBOO OT When FB BOOT is insta
alled, the resouurces included
d in the sga.fb
boot
file is installed. file are loaded into the non-volaatile memory y of the devvice.
Deleting FBOOT does s not remove tthe resources from memoryy.
Note:
• IIf you have an
ny failed resou
urces, please g
go back to the
e SGA applica ation to check the function blocks
b and linkks.
• The operationn of SGA is ind
dependent of tthe device beiing in Local orr Remote modde.

For more
e details plea
ase refer to NOJA
N 5019 S
Smart Grid Automation
A (S
SGA) User G
Guide.

8.5.2 Logic Throtttling


If the number of lo ogic operatioons impacts on the perrformance of the devicee(1), the rela ay will limit the
responsiiveness of the logic pro ocess. This 'logic throttliing' will occur for 30 m inutes or un ntil a new loogic
configura t system rrestarts. While logic throtttling is appl ied, the relay will enforcce a
ation is downloaded or the
minimumm interval of 200ms
2 between the handdling of logic
c triggering events. It is ppossible for trriggering eve
ents
to be misssed while th
his occurs.

Note 1: The relay willl apply logic throttling whe


en 200 or more logic evalu
uations have occurred with
hin any 3 seccond
Logic Configurration Issue” warning will be reported. Refer to secction Appendiix F – Indica
iinterval. A “L ation
SSignals.

8.5.3 SGA
A Throttle
e Thresh
hold
If the number of exe ecuted SGA events
e in a o
one second window
w exceeeds the throottle threshold (150 even nts),
a time de elay is applie
ed before the
e application
n can move to o the next evvent. The thrrottle threshoold and the tiime
delay are dependentt on the num mber of embe edded resou urces running g on the devvice i.e. if the
ere is one SGA
S
embedde ed resource running on the device, after 150 ev vents have beenb executeed there will be a 1ms tiime
delay, if there are twwo SGA embe edded resou rces running g on the device each embbedded resource will havve a
throttle tthreshold of 75 and the time
t delay wwill be 2ms, iff there are th
hree SGA em mbedded res sources runnning
on the de evice each embedded
e re
esource will h
have a throttlle threshold of 50 and thee time delay will be 3ms.

Notes:
• The time delay will only be applied to the
e embedded re esource that has reached thhe throttle thre
eshold.
• FFrom firmwaree 1.16 onward ds, the relay onnly allows a maximum
m of three SGA embbedded resourrces to run
ssimultaneouslly (if an SGA application
a waas developed for
f earlier vers sions of firmwaare please ma
ake any
nnecessary chaanges to ensu ure that only th
hree resources s are used).
• You could havve one or morre embedded rresources ass sociated with one
o SGA applilication. Please refer to NOJJA
55019 Smart Grid
G Automatio on (SGA) Userr Guide for mo ore details.

OSM User Ma
anual Control
C and
a Indic
cation 129
NOJA
A-5002-08

9 Ins
stallattion
Installation of both the OSM Auto Circuitt Recloser and RC Co ontrol Cubiccle is straightforward. Itt is
recomme ended the preparation
p foor installatio n be done in
n a clean wo
orkshop envvironment an nd the prepaared
equipme ent is transpo
orted to site.

9.1 De
e–crating
The OSM
M Auto Circu uit Recloser and
a RC Cub icle are pack ked in a singlle crate conta
taining:
• Routine Testt Summary and a User Ma anual in the document
d pocket Inside thhe RC Cubic
cle
• OOSM Auto Circuit
C Reclosser Tank
• Pole Mountin ng Bracket and
a fastenerss
• RC Control
• CControl Cablle
• VVT (if require
ed) and its mounting
m braccket
Access into the cratte is by paneels fastened with tabs. The
T top and sides of thee crate can be removed by
bending up the metaal tabs with a screwdriverr and hamme er allowing prroduct removval.

9.2 RC
C Cubicle Prepa
aration
The batttery of the Control
C Cub
bicle may ha ave discharg ged during transit or stoorage. The Control
C Cubicle
should h
have an auxilliary AC supp
ply fitted prio
or to carrying
g out prepara
atory testing.

9.2.1 Aux
xiliary Supply Con
nnection
ns
The RC Cubicle requ uires an AC supply to be
e connected into the circu
uit breaker. T
The cubicle is configured for
the corre
ect auxiliary supply voltage (110Vac or 220Vac) at the factory as requestted by the cuustomer prioor to
delivery.

Refer to section 4.4 for


f configura
ation and con
nnection deta
ails.

9.2.2 RC and
a OSM
M Compa
atibility
The OSMM Recloser and
a RC Cubicle are matcched and tes sted togetherr in the factoory. Recloserr type is defin
ned
by the O
OSM Serial Number.
N It is
s important tthat the OSMM Serial Nummber matchees the OSM Serial Num mber
program
mmed into the
e RC Controller. Refer to Section 9.2.5.

Measureement within specification


n requires a set of sensoor calibration coefficientss to be progra ammed into the
RC Conttrol Relay me
emory. Durin ng factory Rooutine Test, the calibratio
on coefficiennts relating to
o the OSM ha ave
been pre
e-programme ed into the memory
m of the
e RC accommpanying it. Where
W this iss not done, th
he correct se
et of

130 Ins
stallation
n OSM Us
ser Manu
ual
NOJA-5002-008

sensor ccalibration co
oefficients an
nd OSM Reccloser serial number mus
st be progra mmed into the Relay. OSM
measureement coefficcients are reccorded on th
he Routine Te y document pprovided.
est Summary

Retaining pairing is not


n critical, but
b advisablee, otherwise accurate line
e measurem ments cannot be expected d. If
program
mming for an nother OSM is required, section 5.2 2 shows whe ere the RC Measureme ent Settings are
located. Alternately, CMS softwa are can be u
used to downnload a conffiguration filee that has be
een preparedd in
advancee.

If the co
orrect Measu urement setttings have b been misplaced, they ca an be suppllied by your nearest NO OJA
Power office or distributor. For prrovision of th
he correct settings the OS
SM Recloserr serial numb
ber, as record
ded
on the ra
ating plate, iss required.

9.2.3 Initia
al Check
ks
ngs. Prior to commissionning, the corrrect settings for
The RC cubicle is shipped with default Prottection settin
the inten
nded applicattion must be programme d.
Before ccommencing tests make sure the AC C supply is coonnected. Ne
ext open thee escutcheon n panel and turn
t
on the battery circuitt breaker. Ob
bserve the sttart-up mess
sage on the LCD
L Panel, tthe flashing System runnning
LEDs on n the front pa
anel and otheers on the SI M, Relay and I/O Module
e(s).

1. Press the Pa
anel ON button to see the
e SYSTEM STATUS
S disp
play.

Panel Navigation
SYSTE M STATUS
[[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYS TUS] ⇒
STEM STAT
►GENERAL◄ WARNIN G CTION
MALFUNC

Date/Time : 21
1/01/2011, 10:00:18
Config : 3 phase, Rec
closer
Status : CClosed

Measurements ality
Power Qua
Input/Output Power Sup
pply
Protection Communica
ations Port
t
Automation Protocols
Logic

Check th
he date and
d time are displayed
d correct, adjust as illustraated in the diagram
corrrectly. If inc d below.

OSM User Ma
anual Insttallation 131
NOJA-5002-08

Panel Navigation
[Turn Panel ON] ⇒ [SYSTEM STATUS] ⇒ [Press ESC]
Ø REAL TIME CLOCK SETTINGS

[MAIN MENU] Date: 21/01/11


ª [System Settings] Time: 14:12:10

ª [RTC Settings] ⇒ Date Format dd/mm/yy


Time Format 24 Hours
Time Zone (hr) +00.00

Select a parameter, enter the password (default is “NOJA”), then change the setting.
Use the arrow keys to change the settings.
Press the Enter key when finished, or ESC to cancel the change.

<